HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Ernst Mayr Library
of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology
ASIATIC
HERPETOLOGICAL
RESEARCH
VOLUME 3
1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Editor
ERMI ZHAO
Chengdu Institute of Biology, Acadcmia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Associate Editors
KELLAR AUTUMN THEODORE j, PAPENFUSS
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of
California, Berkeley, California, USA California, Berkeley, California, USA
J. ROBERT MACEY
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of
California, Berkeley, California, USA
Editorial Board
Kraig Adi.fr
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York, USA
Meiiii a Huang
Zhcjiang Medical University, Hangzhou, Zhejiang,
China
Natalia B. Ananjeva
Zoological Institute, Leningrad, USSR
Leo Borkin
Zoological Institute, Leningrad, USSR
Bihui Chen
Anhui Normal University, Wuhu, Anhui, China
Ylanchong Chen
Shanghai Institute of Biochemistry, Shanghai,
China
ILLYA DAREVSKY
Zoological Institute, Leningrad, USSR
INDRANEIL DAS
Madras Crocodile Bank, Vadanemmeli Perur, Madras,
India
CarlGans
University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan, USA
David M. Green
McGill University, Montreal, Quebec, Canada
Robert F. Inger
Field Museum, Chicago, Illinois, USA
KlJANGYANG LUE
National Taiwan Normal University, Taipei, Taiwan,
China
Hidetoshi Ota
Department of Biology, University of the Ryukyus,
Nishihara, Okinawa, Japan
Anming Tan
University of California, Berkeley, California, USA
William E. Duellman
University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kansas, USA
Hajime Fukada
Scnnyuji Sannaicho, Higashiyamaku, Kyoto, Japan
Datong Yang
Kunming Institute of Zoology, Kunming, Yunnan,
China
Asiatic Herpetological Research is published by the Asiatic Herpetological Research Society (AHRS) and the
Chinese Society for the Study of Amphibians and Reptiles (CSSAR) at the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University
of California. The editors encourage authors from all countries to submit articles concerning but not limited to Asian
herpctology.
Authors should consult Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation and Submission at the end of this issue.
All correspondence outside of the People's Republic of China and requests for subscription should be directed to AHR,
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California, USA 94720. All correspondence within
the People's Republic of China should be directed to Ermi Zhao, Editor, Chengdu Institute of Biology, P.O. Box 416,
Acadcmia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan Province, People's Republic of China.
Subscription and membership are $20 per year ($25 outside of the USA and China, $40 for libraries). Make
checks or money orders payable in US currency to AHRS. If you do not have access to US currency, please notify us,
and we will make other arrangements.
Asiatic Herpetological Research Volume 3 succeeds Chinese Herpetological Research Volume 2, which
was published at the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, 1988-1989 as the journal for the Chinese Society for the Study of
Amphibians and Reptiles. Volume 2 succeeded Chinese Herpetological Research 1987, published for the
Chengdu Institute of Biology by the Chongqing Branch Scientific and Technological Literature Press, Chongqing,
Sichuan, China. Acta Herpetologica Sinica ceased publication February 1988, with Vol. 6, No. 2.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 1-36
Three Species in the Vipera kaznakowi Complex (Eurosiberian Group) in
the Caucasus: Their Present Distribution, Possible Genesis, and
Phylogeny*
NIKOLAI L. ORLOV1 AND BORIS S. TUNIYEV2
^Zoological Institute. USSR Academy of Sciences, Leningrad, USSR
2Causasian State Biosphere Reserve, Sochi, USSR
Abstract.-Thiee valid species: Vipera ka2nakowi Nikolsky, V. dinniki Nikolsky and V. darevskii
Vedmedeja, Orlov, and Tuniyev of the "Vipera kaznakowi " complex belonging to the Eurosiberian viper
group are recognized. The distributions of the closely related species, V. kaznakowi and V. dinniki are
defined. The habitat of V. kaznakowi is present along the Black Sea coast, from Khopa Village (Turkey)
in the south, to Maikop (USSR) in the north. Vipera kaznakowi is associated with montane areas from
sea level up to 1000 m. The range of V. dinniki covers the northern and southern slopes of the Great
(Main) Caucasus Ridge, ranging from the Fisht-Oshten Massive in the west to Shkhara Mountain in the
east. Vipera dinniki tends to be restricted to alpine and subalpine zones at elevations from 1 500 m to
3000 m. Vipera darevskii occurs in the southeastern part of the Dzhavachet Mountain Ridge, Armenia,
near the border with Georgia. The history of studies on the vipers of the "Vipera kaznakowi " complex is
summarized. The possible genesis of the present distributions of these vipers and their phylogenetic
relationships are discussed. Comparative morphological and ecological characters of the three species are
listed.
Key Words: Reptilia, Serpentes, Viperidae, Vipera, USSR, Caucasus, systematics, ecology.
Introduction
The study of the following viper species
of the Caucasus, Vipera kaznakowi
Nikolsky 1909, V. dinniki (Nikolsky
1913), and V. darevskii Vedmederja,
Orlov and Tuniyev 1986 and the history of
their distributions is of great interest for
understanding the phylogenetic links of the
Eurosiberian shield-headed vipers from the
Caucasus (subgenus Pelias, Merrem 1808)
and the formation of the present snake
fauna in the west Caucasus Isthmus.
Ever since Nikolsky (1909) described
the Caucasus Viper, Vipera kaznakowi, the
understanding of the taxonomic position of
this species has constantly varied. Also,
ideas regarding the habitats of those forms
referred to this species have varied (Orlov
and Tuniyev 1986). We recognize at least
three closely related species within the V.
f This publication combines material previously
published in Russian by Orlov and Tuniyev (1986)
and Vedmederja et al. (1986) with additional
information.
kaznakowi complex. All of them occur
primarily in the western part of the
Caucasus Isthmus. The eastern boundary
of the species range needs to be defined.
The Caucasus vipers (Fig. 1) have been
recorded from the following localities:
Western Dagestan in the vicinity of
Khasav-Yurt (Krasovsky 1929, 1932).
Along the slope of Makh-khokh
Mountain from the highlands of Ingushetia
(Chernov 1929).
On Legli Mountain in the Gukasyansky
region, Armenia (Darevsky 1956).
In the vicinity of Ushguli at the foothills
of Shkhara Mountain in Svanetia, Georgia
(Muskhelishvili 1959).
In Borzhomi Canyon, Georgia
(Bakradze 1969, 1975; Bannikov et al.
1977).
In Lagodekhi, Georgia (Zoological
Institute, the USSR Academy of Sciences,
Nos. 8389 and 13769).
1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 2
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 1. The distributions of the vipers from the Vipera kaznakowi complex and the Vipera ursini
complex in the Caucasus. 1. V. kaznakowi, 2. V. dinniki, 3. V. darevskii, 4. V. ursini renardi
(northern population) and V. ursini eriwanensis (southern population). Type localities: A -V.
kaznakowi; B, B' -V. dinniki; C-V. darevskii. Localities: 1 -Makh-Khokh Mountain; 2 -the
settlement of Khasav-Yurt; 3 -Lagodekhi; 4 -Benis-Kheri Canyon; 5 -the settlement of Khopa, Turkey;
6 -Mikhailovsky Pass; 7 -the settlement of Ubinskaya; 8 -the town of Maikop; 9 -the mouth of the
Urushten River; 10 -the Fisht-Oshtenovsky Massive; 11 -Shkhara Mountain. Extreme points of the
distributions are marked.
All three species, Vipera kaznakowi, V.
dinniki and V. darevskii, differ in
morphology and ecology (Vedmederja
1984; Orlov and Tuniyev 1986).
History of the study of the Vipera
kaznakowi complex.
The taxonomic problems and
interrelationships of the viper forms of the
Eurosiberian group in the Caucasus has
caused contradictions and has confused
zoologists for nearly a hundred years. The
fragmented highland landscapes within the
overall range of the Caucasus vipers
isolates even neighboring populations.
Hence, there is an accumulation of unique
characteristics in populations. Very
complex situations emerge in sympatric
areas of closely related species of" this
complex. This may be connected with
natural hybridization. Occasionally the
identification of some individuals from
intergrading populations is difficult. This
particularly concerns Vipera dinniki in the
areas of its interactions with V. kaznakowi,
and additionally with the vipers of the V.
ursini complex (Bonaparte). The high
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 3
FIG. 2. Type localities of the vipers of the Vipera kaznakowi complex proposed over the history of the
study. A -V. kaznakowi Nikolsky, described in 1909, collected from Tsebelda, the vicinity of Sukhumi,
Abkhazia, Georgia. B, B' -V. Berus dinniki Nikolsky, described in 1913, from the upper reaches of the
Malaya Laba River, the Caucasus Reserve, Krasnodarsky Territory and Svanetia, Georgia (respectively).
C -V. tigrina Tzarewsky, described in 1916, taken from the Northern Caucasus. D-V. berus ornata
Basoglu, described in 1947 from the settlement of Khopa, Artviisky Vilayet, Turkey. E -V. darevskii
Vedmederja, Orlov, and Tuniyev, 1986, from Legli Mountain, the Mokrye Mountains, Gukasyansky
Region, Armenia. F-V. kaznakowi orientalis Vedmederja, 1984 from the eastern part of the Main
Caucasus Ridge.
degree of phenotypic polymorphism in
vipers from the V. kaznakowi complex
also creates additional problems in the
evaluation of their taxonomic position.
Due to the complexity in identification of
these vipers and the absence of definite
localities for specimens an analysis of old
literature gives only an approximate idea
regarding the relationships of the Vipera
kaznakowi complex.
Rossikow (1890) mentioned "multi-
colored" vipers in the Northern Caucasus
defined as Vipera berus. Boettger (1893)
regarded the dispersal of two closely related
viper species, V. berus and V. renardi
from the Caucasus as a phenomenon that
deserves attention. Nikolsky (1905)
considered V. berus to be associated with
Transcaucasia whereas V. renardi inhabits
steppe areas of the Precaucasus and
mountains of the Northern Caucasus.
Leister (1908a) in his sketch on the
geographic distribution of V. renardi and
V. berus within the Caucasus wrote that V.
Vol. 3, p. 4
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
renardi is associated with steppe areas
which separate the Caucasus from the
habitat of V. berus, and also the mountains
of the Northern Caucasus. He also
confirmed Boettger's and Nikolsky's
opinions that V. berus also appears in
Transcaucasia. In the northern
Transcaucasia there is an isolated
population. According to Boettger (1899),
the individuals of V. berus which are
preserved at the Caucasus Museum (now
the Museum of Georgia) were collected
from Suani, Tiflis, Avar, Kodzhori,
Khasav-Yurt, and Kazikoparan, whereas
those from the Senckenburg Museum
(Frankfurt-am-Main, West Germany) were
taken from Sukhumi, Georgia.
Leister (1908a,b,c) gives a list of Vipera
berus specimens in the collection of the
Zoological Museum of the Academy of
Sciences (now Zoological Institute of the
USSR Academy of Sciences) taken from
the Caucasus: 1) from Tiflis and
Lagodekhi regions, Georgia and 2) from
Yelenovka near the Gochka Lake (now the
Sevan Lake). Leister then states that he
found V. renardi on the bank of the
Gochka Lake at the same locality where
Kessler and Brandt collected V. berus (this
specimen, ZIN 5478, collected by Brandt
we determined to be V. ursini ). On the
basis of the findings of Kessler and Brandt
and his own findings, Leister comes to the
conclusion that both species, V. berus and
V. renardi, live sympatrically. Concerning
the specimens collected by Kessler and
Brandt, Nikolsky (1905) writes that their
rostral touches only one apical scale like in
V. renardi. In all other characters they look
more like V. berus. This led Leister
(1908a) to consider that a certain
intermediate species is possible — an
ancestral form of V. berus and V. renardi.
Nikolsky (1913) referring to the vipers
from Transcaucasia listed by Kessler,
Brandt and Leister nevertheless concluded
that they are V. renardi. Leister (1908a,b),
having analyzed the collections, concludes
that the territory of the Northern Caucasus
and Transcaucasia are inhabited by V.
berus and V. renardi. He thought that V.
berus and V. renardi live sympatrically in
the Northern Caucasus (for instance, the
vicinity of Grozny is a sympatric area).
Since Nikolsky (1909) described Vipera
kaznakowi, a number of synonyms have
been proposed for this species as new
forms have been described and new
combinations proposed. A number of
forms, primarily from the Northern
Caucasus and from the eastern range of V.
kaznakowi have confused taxonomists as
to their relationship to V. kaznakowi.
These forms were placed in different
combinations within V. berus and V.
ursini (Nikolsky 1913, 1916; Basoglu
1947; Knoepfler and Sochurek 1955;
Kramer 1961). Nikolsky (1913) assigned
the common Caucasus viper to a new
subspecies, V. berus dinniki. He defined
the viper's range as the northern and
southern slopes of the Caucasus Ridge
from the Malaya (Small) Laba River
headwaters up to Elbrus Mountain. Morits
(1916) also recorded V. berus in the
Northern Caucasus. Tsarevsky (1916)
described a new form V. tigrina that was
closely related to V. renardi and V.
kaznakowi. Unfortunately he cited the
species locality solely as "the Northern
Caucasus."
Nikolsky (1909, 1911, 1913, 1916), the
author of Vipera kaznakowi and V. berus
dinniki descriptions, studied the
relationships of the species V. kaznakowi,
V. berus, and V. renardi (= V. ursini
renardi ) and noted the difficulties in
identification of these forms. Nikolsky
(1913) described V. berus dinniki from a
single specimen collected by N. Y. Dinnik
at the upper reaches of the Malaya Laba
River, and from three specimens found by
Shelkovnikov in Svanetia, Georgia. In his
next monograph, Nikolsky (1916)
discussed both forms: Coluber berus
dinniki and Coluber kaznakowi. The
range of the former was defined as the
Caucasus Mountains on both sides of the
Great Caucasus Ridge. The upper reaches
of the Bolshaya (Big) Laba River was
designated as a sympatric zone for V. berus
dinniki and V. renardi. In his opinion, V.
renardi was closely associated with the
Caucasus Black Sea coast and the northern
slope of the Caucasus Ridge.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 5
Dinnik (1926) noted that Viper a berus
and V. kaznakowi occurred in the Northern
Caucasus. Krasovsky (1929) indicated that
V. berus inhabited Khasav-Yurt and
Rutulsky Kanton, Dagestan. Chernov
(1929) recorded Coluber berus dinniki in
the highlands of Ingushetia on the southern
slope of Makh-khokh Mountain. The
specimens were collected by D. Krasovsky
in 1926 (Fig. 1). Krasovsky (1933)
included both V. kaznakowi and V. berus
in the fauna of the Caucasus State Reserve.
Bartenev and Reznikova (1935) concluded
that V. kaznakowi and V. berus dinniki
were distributed in the western Caucasus,
whereas in the alpine, V. ursini renardi
also occurred. Rostombekov (1939)
recorded V. kaznakowi as part of the fauna
of Abkhazia. A new form, V. berus
ornata, was described from northeast
Anatolia (Basoglu 1947). Later on Mertens
(1952a) synonymized it with V .
kaznakowi. Terentyev and Chernov
(1949) regarded V. tigrina Tzarevsky and
V. berus dinniki Nikolsky as junior
synonyms of V. kaznakowi Nikolsky
which is, in their opinion, related to V.
ursini renardi.
Darevsky (1956) presented a new
combination of names for the viper from
the Gukasyansky region, Armenia: Vipera
ursini renardi. Fyodorov (1956) recorded
V. berus in the forests of the premontane
area of the Stavropolsky Territory and V.
kaznakowi in the subalpine belt. In his
survey of the snake fauna of Abkhazia,
Georgia, Milyanovsky (1957) mentions V.
kaznakowi. Muskhelishvili (1959) records
V. kaznakowi on Mount Shkhara from the
vicinity of Ushguli, Svanetia, Georgia.
Kramer (1961) regards V. tigrina a junior
synonym of V. kaznakowi, whereas V.
berus dinniki should be synonymized with
V. ursini renardi. Bakradze (1969) found a
female V. kaznakowi in the town of Banis-
Khevi, near Borzhomi, Georgia. On the
basis of this finding, he suggested that the
species habitat covered the entire Adzharo-
Imeretinsky Ridge and some of the
Trialetsky Ridge.
In the field guide of Bannikov et al.
(1977) the names Vipera berus dinniki, V.
tigrina and V. berus ornata are mentioned
as junior synonyms of V. kaznakowi.
Vedmederja (1977) recorded V. kaznakowi
in Adgaria, Georgia. In his opinion
(Vedmederja 1984) V. kaznakowi is a
polytypic species comprising four
subspecific forms. Tertyshnikov (1977),
in defining ecological and zoogeographic
subdivisions of the herpetofauna of the
Northern Caucasus, noted that V.
kaznakowi tends to be restricted to western
and southwestern montane regions. The
most recent taxonomic works dealing with
these vipers state that V. berus occurs
neither in the Caucasus nor in the
Precaucasus. Hence, V. kaznakowi is the
sole valid name with regard to shield-
headed vipers from the western Caucasus
Isthmus and northeast Anatolia. The
taxonomic status of the eastern populations
from Dagestan and Armenia was not
discussed (Terentyev and Chernov 1949;
Mertens 1952a; Mertens and Wermuth
1960; Klemmer 1963; Bannikov et al.
1977; Baran 1977; Harding and Welch
1980).
The study of old collections and
literature shows that the majority of
researchers did differentiate the vipers from
the Vipera ursini complex and the V.
kaznakowi complex. The major
difficulties in defining the systematic
position and taxonomic status concerned
primarily the vipers from the eastern range
of the V. kaznakowi complex. References
that V. berus occurs in the Northern
Caucasus and Transcaucasia more often
than not concern snakes from the V.
kaznakowi complex rather than those from
the V. ursini complex.
An analysis of literature data and
morphometric characteristics of 141 viper
specimens allowed Vedmederja et al.
(1986) to designate three species within the
Vipera kaznakowi complex:
1. V. kaznakowi Nikolsky, 1909
2. V. dinniki Nikolsky, 1913
3. V. darevskii Vedmederja, Orlov and
Tuniyev, 1986
Vol. 3, p. 6
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Fig. 2 represents type localities of the
forms proposed for the Vipera kaznakowi
complex over the history of its study.
Systematic Accounts
Vipera kaznakowi Nikolsky, 1909
(Fig. 3, 4, 14a, Plate 1)
Chronology of species description
Vipera renardi (Christoph) - Silantyev,
1903, 30:37 (part).
Vipera kaznakowi Nikolsky, 1909:174;
Nikolsky, 1910:81, table 1.
Vipera kaznakowi - Nikolsky,
1913:179-181; colored plate III (=Fig. 3,
this paper).
Coluber kaznakowi - Nikolsky,
1916:244-247.
Vipera berus ornata Basoglu, 1947:182-
190.
Vipera ursini kaznakowi - Knoepfler and
Sochurek, 1955:185-188.
Vipera kaznakowi - Terentyev and
Chernov, 1949:270-277 (Map 15);
Bannikov et al., 1977:323-324 (map 133;
colored plate 31, 4).
Vipera kaznakowi kaznakowi -
Vedmederja, 1984:8.
The English common name is the Caucasus
Viper, or Kaznakow's Viper.
Lectotype1: No. 4408, an adult female.
Collected by Y. V. Voronov from
Tsebelda, the vicinity of Sukhumi,
Abkhasia, the Caucasus. It is stored in the
Caucasian Museum (now the Museum of
Georgia, Tbilisi).
+ Kramer (1961) was mistaken regarding this
specimen as the holotype, because Nikolsky (1909)
had not singled out a holotype from the five
specimens from which he described the species.
Diagnosis: A large snake for the
Eurosiberian group. Total length reaches
650-700 mm. Dorsally the head is covered
with large scales. In size and shape they
differ considerably from body scales.
Nostril is cut through either in the middle or
slightly closer to the lower edge of the
nasal. Upper-lateral edge of snout is
pointed. Rostral normally reaches two
apical scales on upper snout. Upper edge
of the nasalorostral scale is slightly curved
at obtuse angles. Scales of anterior frontal
have weak longitudinal keels. Head is
broad and normally black dorsally. Head is
separated from body by a sharp nuchal
collar.
Description: The ratio of body length to
tail length is 5.7 to 6.4 in males and 7.5 to
10.9 in females. Unlike other species
assigned to the Vipera kaznakowi
complex, red and yellow colors prevail in
V. kaznakowi. Melanistic specimens are
common. However, unlike complete
melanistic individuals of V. dinniki, those
of V. kaznakowi preserve yellow or red
color on either upper or lower labials.
Vipera kaznakowi is either black or dark
brown striped dorsally and laterally. Often
stripes merge so that only red or yellow
spots remain between them. Ventrum is
black. Head is very broad, impressed
dorsally. This fact is emphasized by a
slightly pointed upper edge of snout.
Cheeks are greatly swollen. Head is well
separated from body by a thin nuchal
collar. Comparative data on scalation and
size characters are listed in Tables 1-4.
Variability and comparative remarks
V. kaznakowi (Fig. 4, Plate 1) is
undoubtedly more closely related to V.
berus and V. ursini. Supposedly, when
interacting with V. ursini renardi and V.
ursini eriwanensis it forms two species of
hybrid genesis: V. dinniki and V.
darevskii. From all listed forms it differs
by: 1) the extraordinarily great width of the
triangular head, 2) the head width of
specimens of this species equals the
distance between tip of snout and posterior
angle of mouth slot, 3) the "cheeks" are
greatly swollen, hence a broad furrow
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 7
Nikolski. Nova species viperae.
H3B. K»bk. My3. T. V.
A. 3. E. Tom J. I.
II KiiiniiKiir C, TI- E.
Vipera kaznakovi sp n
FIG. 3. Type specimen of Vipera kaznakowi Nikolsky, 1913 (reproduced from Plate III, originally
printed in color, Nikolsky 1913).
Vol. 3, p. 8
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 1 . Comparative scale characters of the three viper species of the "Vipera kaznakowi " complex.
TABLE 2. Sexual dimorphism of body length and number of subcaudals in the three viper species of the
"Vipera kaznakowi " complex.
to* 9
4.5
5.6
2.82
< 0.001
< 0.001
<0.05
TABLE 3. A comparison of the number of vertebrae carrying ribs in Shield Headed .Vipers of the USSR.
X-ray analysis of the vipers indicates that the number of rib-carrying vertebrae is stable, except for Vipera
dinniki, (indicated by **) in which the number varied from 128 to 140.
Specific and subspecific
viper forms
Vipera berus
Vipera kaznakowi
Vipera darevskii
Vipera dinniki
Vipera ursini renardi
Vipera u. eriwanensis
Vipera dinniki
appears between eye and temple. The
furrow goes up to upper head, parallel to
upper edge of parietals. Dorsally the head
is either impressed or flat. The viper also
differs from closely related species in body
proportions: 1) it is relatively thicker, more
massive; 2) the head is conspicuously
bigger. These habitus characters
differentiate all age groups of V. kaznakowi
ranging from juveniles to mature
specimens. Comparative data on
pholidosis, size, and number of vertebrae
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 9
TABLE 4. Comparative morphology of vipers in the "Vipera kaznakowi " complex.
Vipera kaznakowi, 64 specimens
• SVL 8 8 ^475 mm
SVL V 9 y< 600 mm
• SVL 86/ CI. x 5.6-6.4
SVL 9 9/ CL as 7.5-10.9
• Head is either impressed or flat
dorsally
• Edge of snout is slightly rounded
V. dinniki, 68 specimens
• SVL 6 6 ^ 412 mm
SVL 9 9 ^486 mm
• SVL 8 8/ CL a 5.9-7.4
SVL 9 9/ CL as 7.9-13 5
• Head is either flat or slightly
protuberant dorsally
• Edge of snout is rounded
• Rostral is broad. Usually touches <
two apical scales (in 91% specimens)
rarely one apical (in 9%)
• The width of the frontal is equal to i
1.21-1.72 of its length
• The distance between anterior edge i
of the frontal and the rostral is equal
to 0.75-1.05 of the frontal edge
• Frontal is either smaller than (
parietals or equals them
• Large lower oculars are separated i
from frontal either by one row (in
87.0%) or rarely by two rows of
small scales (in 12.4%)
• The upper pre -ocular does not touch (
the nasal in 96.1%. In 3.9% it does
• Nostril is either cut through in the i
middle of nasal or is slightly shifted
downwards
• Nasal does not touch rostral <
• Body scales with expressed keels; <
some scale rows that reach ventrals
have no keels
Rostral is narrow reaching either one
(in 48.6%) or two (in 51.4%) apicals
The width of the frontal is equal to
1.13-1.83 of its length
The distance between anterior edge of
the frontal and the rostral is equal to
0.77-1.35 of the frontal edge
Frontal is either smaller than parietals
or equals them
Large lower oculars are separated from
frontal either by one row (in 58.5%) or
two rows (in 41.5%)
The upper pre-ocular does not touch
the nasal in 86.6%. In other cases it
reaches the nasal
Nostril is cut through in the center or
nasal. It may be shifted downwards
exceedingly rarely
Nasal does not touch rostral
Body scales have expressed keels. 76%
of scales that reach ventrals have no
keels, 18.4% have slightly expressed
keels, 5.6% have well-expressed keels
V. darevskii, 9 specimens
• SVL 8 8 ? 258 mm
SVL 9 9?* 421 mm
SVL 88 / CL a 6.0-6.5
SVL 9 9 / CL a8.4-9.3
• Head is either flat or slightly
protuberant dorsally
• Edges of snout are slightly pointed
laterally. Anterior edge is a little
rounded
• Rostral is more narrow and touches
one (in three specimens) or two (in six
specimens) apical scales
• The width of the frontal is equal to
1.48-1.71 of its length
• The distance between anterior edge of
the frontal and the rostral is equal to
0.67-1.07 of the frontal edge
• Frontal is larger than parietals
• Large lower oculars are separated from
frontal only by a single row of small
scales (in all nine specimens)
• The upper pre-ocular does not touch
the nasal in two specimens. In seven
specimens it does
• Nostril is cut through in the lower part
of the nasal
• Nasal does not touch rostral
• Body scales have expressed keels.
Some scale rows that reach ventrals
have no keels
supporting ribs are given in Tables 1-4.
Coloration. Vipera kaznakowi are
incredibly diverse in color and
extraordinarily bright among shield-headed
vipers. Red hues prevail in the color
pattern. Newborns are similarly bright in
color, primarily red brown, unlike the gray
young of V. dinniki. The typical intensive
red color appears in V. kaznakowi after
they have shed twice. Complete melanists
are frequent in populations. Often the black
dorsal stripe merges with lateral stripes so
that either red or yellow spots arranged in
two rows along the dorsum remain. The
dorsal stripe can be either zig-zag shaped or
in the shape of an even broad line.
Ventrum is black. Head pattern of adult
specimens normally blends with the dorsal
stripe. In immature specimens, the head
pattern may be separated from the dorsal
stripe by a light interval that disappears
after maturation.
Vol. 3, p. 10
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 4. Vipera kaznakowi (ZIN 1 1529) from the isolated forest of Babuk-Aul.
PLATE 1 . Vipera kaznakowi (ZIN 1 1529) from the isolated forest of Babuk-Aul.
PLATE 2. One pattern variation of Vipera dinniki from Krasnaya Polyana (ZIN 12153), a male.
PLATE 3. Vipera ursini eriwanensis from the valley of Kassach, the foothills of the Ara-Fler Mountains.
Orlov and Tuniyev
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Plate 1
%
Muy^ \JU
Vipera kaznakowi
Orlov and Tuniyev
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Plate 2
Vipera dinniki
\
au^ if\\
Orlov and Tuniyev
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Plate 3
Vipera ursini eriwanensis
1
2Uu# W
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 11
Sexual dimorphism. Maximum body
length is longer in females (up to 600 mm)
than in males (does not exceed 457 mm).
Males have longer tails (Table 2).
Accordingly, the number of ventrals is
greater in females, whereas the number of
subcaudals is greater in males. Males are
more slender. Sexual dimorphism in
coloration is feebly marked. Melanistic
individuals are more frequent among
females.
Age variability. Vipera kaznakowi are
born with the typical adult color and
pattern. However, in newborns these
characters are less pronounced than in
adults. Newborn snakes may be either
pinkish or reddish. According to our
observations on birth and development of
snakes from the Sochi-Khosta populations,
the coloration becomes stronger with each
subsequent shedding. Maximal color
intensity is achieved by the season after the
first hibernation.
Melanistic specimens are born with the
typical species pattern, but their coloration
is darker. The coloration becomes darker
during subsequent sheddings and elements
of the pattern merge.
New born litters are homogeneously
colored. On maturing, the coloration
becomes diverse. Phenotypic
polymorphism in mature vipers of a litter is
great. Either partial or nearly complete
melanism is observed in all vipers from this
population. This is typical for a number of
other animals from humid subtropic areas
adjacent to the Black Sea coast (Bartenev
and Reznikova 1935). Specimens showing
maximal melanism always preserve
elements of orange and red on the throat
scales and chin shields, the rostral, upper
labials and subcaudals. Melanistic
specimens of V. dinniki can have
completely black coloration by maturity.
Geographic range and ecology. The
species ranges along the Black Sea coast
from the town of Khopa, Turkey and
Suramsky Pass in the east, then throughout
Kolchida (Colchis) up to Mikhailovsky
Pass in the west. It is then found up to the
northern slope of the Main Caucasus
Ridge. Here Vipera kaznakowi occurs
along the foothills from the settlement of
Ubinskaya in the west to the town of
Maikop, USSR in the north and the mouth
of the Urushten River in the east (Fig. 1
from Vedmederja et. al. 1986). The
species generally occurs up to an elevation
of 800 m. Along the river valleys of the
Black Sea coast, it may occur up to an
elevation of 1000 m or even higher.
Vipera kaznakowi is a forest dwelling
species. It occurs on montane wooded
slopes, in the bottoms of humid canyons,
and in meadows adjacent to forests. It is
recorded in Quercetum azaleorum and
Quercetum coggygriosecornosum oak
groves, in mixed subtropic forests with
evergreen subforests of Quercus
hartwissiana, Quercus iberica, Alnus
barbata, Fagus orientalis, Taxus baccata,
Laurocerasus officinalis, Buxux colchicus,
Castanetum colchicum, Fagetum nudum,
Salictum fontenale, and Alnetum
strut hiopteridor sum. In addition, this
species is found in polydominant forests in
river terraces and large overgrown
outcroppings. At the upper limits of its
elevational range, the species reaches
coniferous forests. It is recorded within the
ecotone of Fageto-Abieta athyridosa-
maxtoherbosa, but the viper never
penetrates deep into coniferous forests.
Vipera kaznakowi is also present within
transformed areas such as meadows formed
after forests are cut, fruit orchards, kitchen
gardens, vineyards, and dilapidated parks
(Red Data Book of the USSR 1978, 1984).
As a rule, vipers occur within sites where
the density of lizards is high.
Typical biotypes are as follows: small
meadows and other illuminated spots in
forests with an exposure providing high
solar radiation in conditions of humid
subtropical climate of the Black Sea coast
of the Caucasus. The sites are located in
the vicinity of standing water, where rocks
exit that are suitable for hibernation. The
climate of the Caucasus coast is greatly
dependent on topographic conditions of the
area that forms a narrow line between the
Caucasus Ridge and the Black Sea. It is
Vol. 3, p. 12
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
situated from northwest to southeast along
the coast. The wall of the Ridge starts from
Anapa. Near Novorossiisk it reaches an
elevation of up to 600 m. Near Tuapse, the
wall exceeds 1000 m above sea level. At
the latitude of Sochi, it is 3000 m high.
The Great Caucasus Ridge presents a
barrier for cold northeastern winds. This
barrier separates the warm humid coast
from the comparatively cold continental
Prekuban area (Korostelyov 1933). In the
east the Adzharo-Imeretinsky Ridge
separates the humid subtropical Kolchida
(Colchis) from the arid regions of the
Eastern Precaucasia. The climatic zone of
the Black Sea coast of the Caucasus
appears to be extremely favorable for
Vipera kaznakowi. The northwestern most
localities for this species (Mikhailovsky
Pass and Stanitsa Ubinskaya) coincide with
Pontic and northwestern floristic regions.
In relief, climate, and vegetation the
northwestern region is a continuation of the
southern coast of the Crimea.
The Pontic region is marked by 1)
subtropical vegetation in the foothills, 2)
great temperature stability, and 3) high
humidity (Korostelyov 1933). The limited
dispersal of the species along the northern
slope of the Big Caucasus is in the region
of the "Kolchidian (Colchis) Gates." Due
to the lowering of the western portion of
the Main Caucasus Ridge, interchange of
flora and fauna of Kolchida (Colchis) and
the Prekuban area occurred in the past and
presently occurs. Warm humid air from the
Black Sea breaks through in this part of the
Ridge. On the northern slope of the Big
Caucasus, it creates a small refugium on a
Kolchidian (Colchis) type associated with
Castanea satyra, Buxux colchicus, Ostrya
carpinifolia, Corylus colurna, and others
(Galushko 1974; Kharadze 1974;
Kholyavko et al. 1978). Of the
herpetofauna of Kolkhida B ufo
verucossimus, Triturus vittatus ophryticus,
Pelodytes caucasicus, and Lacerta derjugini
occur along with V. kaznakowi. Along the
entire area of of the Black Sea coast of the
Caucasus, the viper is rare. In a number of
spots it has disappeared. In some
situations, only single specimens of V.
kaznakowi might be encountered.
The highest density of Vipera kaznakowi
that have been observed are in rocky
outcroppings within the forest belt in the
mountains of the Caucasus Reserve. In
beech forests along a road in the valley of
the Achipse River, we have recorded three
specimens per kilometer of road. Single
specimens have been recorded in the
vicinity of Khosta, Babuk-Aul, Guzeripl,
and Kisha Kordons. The density of the
viper is also low in the southern habitats in
Adzharia and Lazistan, Georgia (Basoglu
1947; Vedmederja 1977; Basoglu and
Baran 1977).
Anthropogenic factors are responsible
for declining numbers and populations of
Vipera kaznakowi. There are pressures due
to recreational use of health resorts along
the Black Sea coast, ploughing of sites
near the foothills, and to a smaller extent,
hay-mowing (Red Data Book of the USSR
1978, 1984). Within some resort areas V.
kaznakowi is completely extinct.
Diet. Vipera kaznakowi feeds on various
animals. Different populations show
specific feeding patterns with regard to prey
available. According to data recorded in
captivity, individual preference is observed.
When stimulated to regurgitate, the
following food species were recorded in the
field: Apodemus sylvaticus, a forest
mouse, A. agrarius, a field mouse,
Microtus majori, a juvenile specimen, M.
gud, Sorex raddei, Lacerta saxicola, L.
derjugini, L. praticola and L. agilis. In the
collection of the Zoological Museum of the
Moscow State University a viper specimen
from Bebysyry Lake is preserved. In its
stomach a juvenile grass snake (Natrix
natrix ) was found. Immature individuals
feed on juvenile lizards of the above
mentioned species, and to a lesser extent,
on Orthoptera.
In captivity adult vipers readily take any
small rodents, fledgling sparrows, lizards,
and pieces of chicken. Young vipers
usually start on small lizards and crickets
(Grillus bimaculatus and Achaeta
domestica ). After some months they
usually take newborn mice. After the
viper's bite a prey normally dies in 5-7
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 13
minutes. The snake never persecutes its
prey. It finds the prey some time later
using its olfactory organs. Swallowing
ranges from one minute to 3.5 hours
depending on prey size and the state of a
snake. Complete digestion in the wild
takes up to five days. In captivity digestion
may take 30 to 40 hours at stable
temperature. Optimal day temperature is
26-30°C, and night temperature 18°C
during activity period.
Shedding. Mature vipers normally shed 2
to 3 times during the activity period.
General shedding is observed in June.
New born vipers shed in the first hours
after birth. Before entering hibernation,
they shed again.
Reproduction. Mating is recorded from late
March to April. Birth occurs in late
August. Females give birth to 3 to 5
young. The observed time of birth lasts for
about two hours with intervals of 20 to 40
minutes (Zinyakova and Trofimov 1977).
In captivity, the majority of females give
birth at night, between 2400 and 0600 hrs.
Some individuals are born in transparent
capsules, which the neonates leave in the
first minutes after birth. Females reproduce
annually. Gravid females continue to take
food right up to birth.
Development of young. Neonate Vipera
kaznakowi have a mean body length of
144.75 mm, tail length of 14.0 mm. Mean
body weight is 4.1 g (n=8). After first
shedding on the second day after birth,
newborns start actively feeding on insects
or small lizards. After birth the activity
period is 1.5 to 2.5 months, whereas
newborns of V. dinniki never take food
and almost immediately enter hibernation,
during which snakes increase in length
from 10 to 20 mm. Vipera kaznakowi lose
0.3 g of initial weight during the first
month after birth. In the second month
they restore their initial weight and then
increase it approximately 1 g before
entering hibernation. One year old
specimens have a body length of 200 mm
and a tail length of 24 mm. Vipers reach
sexual maturity by the third year at a SVL
of 350-400 mm.
Territoriality. Like other vipers, Vipera
kaznakowi is conservative in territory use.
The same individuals can be encountered in
the same places during different seasons.
Vipera kaznakowi utilizes considerably
larger individual ranges than V. dinniki.
Seasonal and daily activity. Along the
Black Sea coast of the Caucausus, Vipera
kaznakowi emerge after hibernation in
March at an altitude of 600 to 800 m. On
the northern slope of the Big Caucasus the
vipers appear in the second half of April to
early May when the mean day temperature
is 13°to 16°C. In the foothills the vipers
enter hibernation at the beginning of
November at an altitude of up to 600 m. In
the upper elevational limits of its range V.
kaznakowi hibernate in late September to
early October. New born vipers are more
active than those of other age groups.
Two sharply marked peaks of daily
activity can be observed in Vipera
kaznakowi. In the morning the period of
daily activity ranges from 0730 to 1130
hrs, and in the evening from 1630 to 1830
hrs. At those times the soil temperature
does not exceed 30-32°C in the sites
inhabited by V. kaznakowi.
Sympatric species. Along with Vipera
kaznakowi the following species of reptiles
occur: Lacerta derjugini, L. saxicola, L.
praticola, L. agilis, Anguis fragilis,
Pseudopus apodus, Coluber najadum, C.
jugularis, Elaphe longissima, Natrix natrix,
N. tessellata, and Coronella austriaca.
Narrow sympatric areas appear with
Testudo graeca, Lacerta trilineata, L.
caucasica, L. rudis, L. parvula, L. mixta,
Elaphe hohenackeri, Vipera ursini, and V.
dinniki.
Vipera dinniki Nikolsky, 1913
(Fig. 5, 6, 7, 12, 14ab,16, Plate 2)
Species description in chronology
Vipera berus - Boettger in Radde,
1899:286; Nikolsky, 1905:304 (ad
Caucasus).
Pelias chersea - Menetries, 1 832:73 (part).
Vol. 3, p. 14
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Vipera xanthina -Dinnik, 1902:34.
Vipera renardi - Silantyer, 1903, 30:37
(part).
Vipera berus dinniki Nikolsky, 1913:176-
179.
Coluber berus dinniki - Nikolsky,
1916:240-244.
Vipera tigrina Tzarevsky, 1916:32-37.
Vipera ursini renardi - Kramer, 1961:715.
Vipera ursini kaznakowi - Knoepfler and
Sochurek, 1955:185-188.
Vipera kaznakowi - Terentyev and
Chernov, 1949:270-271 (map 5);
Bannikov et al., 1977:323-324 (map 133,
colored plate 31,4).
Vipera kaznakowi dinniki - Vedmederja,
1984:8.
Vipera kaznakowi orientalis - Vedmederja,
1984:9, nomen nudum.
The English common name is Dinnik's
Viper or the Caucusus Subalpine Viper.
Lectotype: No. 26044, an adult female
collected by N. Y. Dinnik (Fig. 5) from
the upper reaches of the Malaya (Small)
Laba River, Northern Caucasus and
Svanetia, Georgia (Fig. 2: B, B'). The
specimen is preserved at the Museum of
Natural History, Kharkov State University,
Ukraine.
Diagnosis: Total length reaches 500 to
550 mm. Dorsally the head is covered with
large scales. Nostril is cut through in the
center of the nasal. Upperlateral snout edge
is rounded and slightly pointed. Rostral
touches either one or two apical scales on
upper head. Three to four scale rows with
no keels are between the rostral and frontal.
Head is not broad. Nuchal collar is not
expressed.
Description: In males body length is not
greater than 412 mm; in females it does not
FIG. 5. Lectotype of Vipera dinniki (The
Museum of Natural History of Kharkov State
University 26044).
exceed 486 mm. The ratio of body length
to tail length is 5.9 to 7.4 in males; 7.8 to
13.5 in females. General coloration is not
as bright as in Vipera kaznakowi.
However, specimens with bright yellow
and orange elements can be observed.
Normally V. dinniki (Fig. 6,.Plate 2)
have light brown, grey, silver greyish or
green greyish color which never occurs in
V. kaznakowi. Some specimens have a
dark even dorsal stripe along the center of
the body. The latter substitutes for the zig-
zag shaped stripe typical for the majority of
plate-headed vipers. Ventrum is either dark
and light spotted or light grey and dark
speckled. Neonates of V. dinniki
occasionally don't have the red color of the
body typical for V. kaznakowi. They can
be bom grey brown. The head is relatively
narrower than that of V. kaznakowi. The
nuchal collar is not expressed, unlike in V.
kaznakowi. Upper edge of snout is either
rounded or slightly pointed. Head can be
either protuberant or flat dorsally, but never
impressed like that of V. kaznakowi. Body
is thinner and more delicate. Comparative
data on pholidosis and size characters are
listed in Tables 1-4.
Remarks and variability.
Vipera dinniki greatly resembles
morphologically V. kaznakowi, V. ursini
renardi and V. berus. In size V. dinniki is
smaller than V. kaznakowi and larger than
V. ursini renardi (Table 2). The head
normally is slightly protuberant, seldom flat
and never as broad as that of V .
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 15
FIG. 6. A Female Vipera dinniki from the upper part of the Laba River (ZDN 17281).
kaznakowi. Hence, the nuchal collar is
hardly marked. In body proportions it
primarily resembles V. berus. Normally
the parietals are shorter than the frontal.
Three to four lower labials reach the lower
jaw scale.
Color. Normally Vipera dinniki is not as
brightly colored as V. kaznakowi.
However specimens with either bright
yellow or orange elements occur. Often V.
dinniki have greyish, silver greyish or
green greyish color. This is never recorded
in V. kaznakowi. For all shield-headed
vipers a zig-zag shaped dorsal stripe is a
common pattern element. In V. dinniki the
stripe is often an even broad dark line
which runs along the dorsum. This is
occasionally seen in V. kaznakowi, where
it is usually represented by a row of oblique
Vol. 3, p. 16
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 7. A male Vipera dinniki from the vicinity of Krasnaya Polyana (Red Meadow), [ZIN 12153].
diametrical spots. The dorsal stripe is
separated from the dark sides by lighter
lateral stripes. The ventrum is either dark
with light spots or light grey. The number
of melanistic specimens in populations
ranges from 20 to 25%. Complete
melanistic individuals of V. dinniki do not
have a single light spot in color, unlike
melanists of V. kaznakowi.
Sexual dimorphism. Maximum body
length is greater in females (up to 486 mm),
and smaller in males (up to 412 mm).
Males have longer tails, characteristically
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 17
FIG. 8. A Vipera dinniki from Lagodekhi, an eastern population (ZIN 13769).
thicker at the tail base (Table 2). The
number of ventral scales is greater in
females. The number of subcaudals is
greater in males. Males are more delicately
built than females. Sexual dimorphism in
color is hardly expressed. Coloration in
males is generally brighter and more
contrasting.
Age variability. Neonate vipers are
patterned like adult individuals. However,
the general color is normally grey, unlike
bright red neonates of Vipera kaznakowi.
Only after the third shedding, faint
Vol. 3, p. 18
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
coloration typical for the species (yellow,
reddish, greenish) emerges in V. dinniki.
Color becomes stronger with each
subsequent shedding. Maximum color
strength is reached by maturity. Melanistic
specimens are born with a specific color.
They gradually darken with each shedding.
By the third year, they acquire a black
velvet color.
Geographical range and ecology. The
species ranges from the Fisht-Oshtenovsky
Mountain Range in the west up to Mount
Shkhara in the east. The eastern limits of
this species distribution has not been
worked out and additional eastern localities
are probable. The southern distributional
limit runs along the dark coniferous
highland ecological belt on the southern
slope of the Main Caucasus and South
Frontal Ridges. The northern limit goes
from Mount Shkhara to the west along the
crest of the Main Caucasus Ridge up to the
Bolshaya (Big) Laba River head where it
passes on to a northern macroslope. In the
north it occurs on the Peredovoy (Frontal)
Ridge and reaches the Fisht-Oshtenovsky
Mountain Massive (Orlov and Tuniyev
1986). Research during 1987-1989
showed that Vipera dinniki occurs further
to the east than previously known (Fig. 9).
The problem of subspecific status of the
eastern populations and their interaction
with the vipers of the V. ursini complex
will be addressed in a future paper.
The elevational distribution is generally
between 1500 and 3000 m. Occasionally
the viper may descend slightly lower.
Vipera dinniki is a subalpine montane-
meadow species. It tends to be restricted to
the upper forest belt, subalpine and alpine
meadows, rocky outcroppings and montane
moraines.
Vipera dinniki can be observed in
vegetation associations of Betuletum
calamagrostidosum, Pinetum mystillosum
subalpinum, Fageto Betuleto-Sorbetum
altherbosa-subalpinum, also in Aceretum
trantaltherbosum subalpinum. It is
associated with rock outcrops interspaced
with shrubs of Rhodoretum caucasicus
subalpinus, subalpine highland herbs and
rock debris. It occurs widely in moraines
overgrown with moss, lichens and
Thymus. The biotype of V. Kaznakowi is
always located in the vicinity of water.
Hibernation sites are also located in the
immediate vicinity of summer biotypes. All
types of rock outcrops are inhabited.
Vipera dinniki can be found in limestone,
slate, and crystalline outcrops.
Climatic conditions within the range of
Vipera dinniki are much more severe than
those of V. kaznakowi. However, the
viper's distribution in severe highlands
coincides with the mildest climatic places in
this severe area. Vipera dinniki commonly
occurs on slopes with a southern or
southeastern exposure. For instance, on
Mount Aibga, 23 km away from the sea, at
an altitude in excess of 1800 m, the mean
temperature in January is -0.1°C
(Korostelyov 1933; Shkadova 1979).
Mean temperature in July is only 13.7°C on
Mount Achisko at an altitude of 1750 m (37
km away from the sea). However, great
temperature drops never occur in this area,
even in winter. As regards to soil freezing,
minimum temperature in January is -7°to -
8°C (Selyaninov 1933). Due to solar
radiation on slopes with southern and
southeastern exposures, the vipers manage
to maintain high body temperatures during
activity periods.
Vipera kaznakowi reaches the edge, but
does not penetrate deep into the dark
coniferous belt. Vipera dinniki, at its lower
limits, reaches the edge but never penetrates
the dark coniferous belt. Thus, the dark
coniferous belt is a barrier between them.
Occasionally, in spots where this belt is
either absent or is fragmented, for instance
along river valleys, both species occur
sympatrically, forming a narrow line with
intergrading characters. The valley of the
Mzymta River may serve as an example of
a site where the two species come in
contact. The limited distribution of the
species on the northern slope of the Main
Caucasus Ridge might be connected with
the increase of the mountain's aridity and
severe climate towards the east.
Xerophytization is observed from west to
east in the subsequent change of beech
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 19
|*| V 'ipera darevskii
J Vipera dinnik
1 Vipera kaznakowi
| Vipera ursini eriwanensis
J Vipera ursini renardi
FIG. 9. Distribution map of shield-headed vipers in the Caucasus.
forests and Abies forests to pine forests,
and further east, to steppe areas
(Adamyants 1971, Kharadze 1974,
Lavrenko 1980; Agakhanyants 1981). This
change is noted in amphibians and reptiles.
Along with V. dinniki, Lacerta derjugini
and Pelodytes caucasicus fall out and
more xeric species such as Bufo viridis,
Lacerta agilis, and Vipera ursini renardi
dominate.
Population density is different in various
parts of the habitat. It is maximal on rock
outcrops and moraines in the subalpine belt
of the Caucasus Reserve. In July, in
subalpine meadows of the Gertsen Ridge
and along the valley of the Bezymyanka
(Without name) River, 1700 to 1900 m, we
have recorded as many as 5 to 7 vipers per
1 km of a route. At the same time, on an
area of 500 m2, we have recorded up to 6
specimens. This is at an elevation of 1800
m on the Aishkha Ridge in a subalpine
meadow of Aceretum trantaltherbosum
subalpinum. In late June to early July
along the Moloshnaya (Milk) and
Sumasshedshya (Crazy) rivers of the
Mzymta River basin, up to 4 specimens per
100 to 500 m of a route were recorded. In
August, on a bank of the high altitude
Kardavych Lake, we recorded up to 8
specimens per 300 m of a route. On the
Aspidny Ridge, 2000 m above sea level,
we recorded 5 to 6 specimens per 300 to
400 m of a route.
According to Bozhansky (1979), the
density in the subalpine belt is 2 to 6
specimens per hectare. Occasionally,
seasonal accumulations of up to 30-40
Vol. 3, p. 20
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
individuals per hectare are possible. In
other regions the population densities are
much lower. Degradation of localities is
due to intensive cattle grazing in subalpine
meadows. Overall numbers of both V.
kaznakowi and V. dinniki are estimated at
some dozens of thousands (Bannikov and
Makeyev 1976). Apparently the figure may
primarily concern V. dinniki as the number
of V. kaznakowi is rather small.
Diet. Adult Vipera dinniki eat fewer types
of food items than V. kaznakowi. For
instance, in the highlands there are viper
populations that prey either on lizards or on
small mammals as no other food items are
available. When field collected vipers were
stimulated to regurgitate, the following prey
were observed: Apodemus sylvaticus,
Microtus majori, Sicista caucasica,
fledglings of ground nesting birds such as
Anthus spinoletta, and Lacerta caucasica.
Immature specimens feed on Orthoptera
and small lizards. In captivity V. dinniki
takes similar food items as V. kaznakowi.
It is often observed that a bitten mouse or a
field-vole makes a few desparate leaps,
falls into a deep crack between rocks and
dies there. The viper skillfully catches its
prey between its teeth, drags it out onto a
level spot, then drops it, examines it from
all sides and having found the prey's head,
swallows it. This behavior is typical for
other rock dwelling vipers from the
Caucasus, such as V. raddei, and V.
ammodytes.
Shedding. Overall, shedding is observed
in June and in late August to early
September. Neonate vipers shed during the
first hours after birth. Some days later they
enter hibernation.
Reproduction. Copulation occurs in late
April to May (Bozhansky 1984). Birth of
neonates on the northern slope of the Main
Caucasus Ridge occurs in August. On the
southern slope it occurs throughout
September. Bozhansky (1983) found two
groups of specimens during the summer.
One group containing males and females
which do not reproduce that year, and the
other group containing gravid females.
Bozhansky suggests that in montane
conditions, female Vipera dinniki have a
reproductive cycle of many years.
Development of the young. In late July to
early August viper embryos reach 70 mm in
length (Orlova 1973). Mean body length of
the neonates is 131.0 mm, tail length is
14.8 mm, mean weight is 3.1 g (N=28).
In the highlands almost right after birth the
vipers enter hibernation. Unlike newly
born Vipera kaznakowi, they do not feed
until the next season. By the third year the
vipers become mature.
Territoriality. Gravid females tend to move
on small areas ranging from 1-4 to 51 m2
Their individual places to a great extent (up
to 98%) overlap. Within their sites the
vipers actively utilize only 2 or 3 places
where they may be encountered at different
times and under various weather
conditions. During the morning the vipers
can be found in places with a western
exposure. Normally, this place is on a rock
surface shaded by a bush. The vipers
utilize direct sun for a short time, leaving a
part of the body under the sun and a part
under a half shaded area. From 1 100-1200
the vipers retreat to burrows and normally
appear after 1500 hours. In gloomy
weather they lie flat on a rock during the
entire period of activity. This increases the
surface of the body contiguity with the
rock. On rare hot days, after midday the
vipers never reappear on the surface.
Males and non-reproducing females emerge
much more seldom, normally after they
have taken food. Bozhansky (1984)
observed some specimens using the same
territories for three seasons.
Insolation is of great importance in the
viper's life. Gravid females take food
rarely and two months before giving birth,
they stop eating. Territory utilization is
entirely dependent on optimal insolation
patterns. Absence of aggressiveness
allows all adult females in a territorial group
to utilize the warmest microhabitats
(Bozhansky 1983, 1984). These data were
collected by Bozhansky during three
summers at an elevation of 2000 m along
the border between the forest and subalpine
belts on Aishkha Ridge, the right ridge of
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 21
the Mzymta River valley, the western
Caucasus. It is amazing that Vipera
kaznakowi from the low altitudes of the
coast have considerably larger individual
sites. The females do not have a multi-year
cycle and never stop taking food while
gravid. The adaptations in the highland V.
dinniki are very important in relatively low
temperatures, rainy periods, and when it
suddenly becomes cold.
Seasonal dynamics in populations.
Biological monitoring in highland
populations from the Caucasus Reserve
testify to their climax state (the collections
of the Zoological Museum of the Moscow
State University and the Zoological
Institute, the USSR Academy of Sciences
were adopted as a zero counting point).
Seasonal dynamics within climax
populations is monotypical. At the
beginning of spring, males emerge first.
Then the percentage of female occurrences
gradually increases. By early-mid June the
sex ratio is 1:1. In mid-late summer males
are seen on the surface less frequently than
females. During the period of pre-
hibernation at the end of summer, males
become more common again. From late
August to mid September, 80% of the
snakes observed are gravid females and
new born individuals. The later can be
observed on the surface even when adults
have entered hibernation. During this
period, the location of new bom individuals
does not necessarily correlate with rock
outcrops which are used as winter shelters.
The newborn snakes migrate much more
than adult snakes.
Seasonal and daily activity. In the spring
vipers emerge from mid April to May when
mean day temperature on the surface
reaches 11°C. Seasonal activity is
dependent on weather conditions. In the
highlands of the Caucasus Reserve the first
snow usually falls in the second half of
September and snow is present until May.
Snow cover is 7-8 m thick. Hence, Vipera
dinniki inhabiting the subalpine belt enter
hibernation in the second half of
September. At elevations of 1800 to
2400 m morning activity is hardly
expressed, whereas evening activity is
shifted from 1700 to 2000 hrs. In gloomy
weather snakes are active throughout
daylight at temperatures higher than 10°C.
At 8°C vipers are not seen on the surface.
Gravid females are seen on the surface even
in drizzling rain. Even if the temperature is
10°C, body temperature in vipers is 30°C,
and cloacal temperature is 26-28°C due to
accumulation of warmth from solar
radiation. This is an important thermal
adaptation of a number of highland reptiles.
Sympatric species. Throughout nearly the
entire range Vipera dinniki is sympatric
with Lacerta caucasica, L. saxicola, Anguis
fragilis, and Coronella austrica.
Vipera darevskii Vedmederja, Orlov,
andTuniyev, 1986
(Fig. 10, 11, 12, 13)
Chronology of species description
Vipera kaznakowi dinniki - Darevsky,
1956:128.
Vipera kaznakowi darevskii - Vedmederja,
1984:8, nomen nudum.
The English common name is Darevsky's
Viper.
Holotype: ZIN 19934, an adult female
from Legli Mountain, the Mokrye (Wet)
Mountains, Gukasynsky region, Armenia.
The specimen was collected in June, 1980
by I. S. Darevsky. The specimen is
preserved at the Zoological Institute, the
USSR Academy of Sciences, Leningrad
(Fig. 10).
Paratypes: ZIN 16546 a and b. The
specimens were collected May 28, 1954;
ZIN 17545, the specimen was collected
August 6, 1955; ZIN 19935, the specimen
was collected June, 1980 by I. S. Darevsky
(Fig. 11).
Holotype description: Body length is
421 mm, head included. Tail length is 46
mm. A female. Head is slightly impressed
dorsally. Lateral snout edges are slightly
pointed. Anterior edge of snout is slightly
rounded. Rostral is narrow. Frontal is
Vol. 3, p. 22
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 10. Holotype of Vipera darevskii (ZIN
19934). a. dorsal view, b. ventral view, c. head.
narrow. Its length is equivalent to 1.66
times its width. Parietals are slightly longer
than the frontal. The frontal is separated
from supraoculars, which protrude over
lateral edge of the snout, by a row of three
scales. Prefrontal is triangular, three times
shorter than the frontal, and is separated
from the rostral by 2 scale rows. Nostril is
cut through in the lower part of the nasal.
The latter is separated from the rostral by a
broad scale. Upper labials and lower
labials are both 9 to the right and 8 to the
left. There are 5 rows of throat scales.
Around the center of the body there are 21
scale rows with strongly expressed keels,
except for two scale rows on both sides
adjacent to the ventrals, which are smooth.
The number of ventrals is 138. There are
25 pairs of subcaudals.
The color is yellowish grey. A zig-zag
shaped brown stripe runs along the
dorsum. At the center of the body its width
is nearly 8 mm. A row of hardly
conspicuous spots is present laterally. The
spots merge into a light brown stripe.
Dorsally, the head has light yellowish spots
along the edges of the frontal, parietals and
lower oculars with yellowish temporals.
Ventrum is blackish marked by light
contours of ventrals (Fig. 10).
Paratypes: Morphological characters of 8
paratypes are listed in the tables 1-4.
General color resembles that of the
holotype, except for 2 specimens. In the
latter the dorsal stripe is interrupted in the
anterior part of the body (Fig. 11).
Diagnosis: This viper is not large. SVL
reaches 460 to 489 mm. Head is slightly
impressed dorsally, covered by big scales.
Lateral edges of snout are slightly pointed.
Anterior snout edge is rounded. Nostril is
cut through in lower part of the nasal.
Head is narrow, hardly separated from
body.
Remarks and variability.
Morphologically, Vipera darevskii
occupies an intermediate position between
V. kaznakowi and V. ursini eriwanensis.
To be more precise, morphologically V.
darevskii occupies a middle position
between the two species of the "Vipera
kaznakowi " complex (V. kaznakowi and
V. dinniki ), on the one hand, and the
steppe vipers from the "V. ursini "
complex, on the other hand. This viper is
considerably smaller in body size than V.
kaznakowi. The head is narrower and the
nuchal collar is less expressed. It differs
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 23
mrf ■■-■ •**<*£*♦>«
^T1 Jr.- •>"♦.:..'.- .Ti>v» Y»£*^a
■ *. .
FIG. 11. The paratypes of Vipera darevskii (ZIN 19935). a., b. dorsal view, c, d. ventral view.
from V. ursini eriwanensis by greater head
height and much less pointed upper anterior
snout edge. Pholidosis data are listed in
Tables 1-3.
Coloration is yellowish or yellowish
grey, which never occurs in Vipera ursini.
Along the dorsum a contrasting zig-zag
shaped brown stripe is present. The
ventrum is dark grey, speckled black and
white. Of the small number of known
specimens, no melanistic individuals have
been found. The coloration of V. darevskii
is evidently more stable than that of the
polymorphic and motley colored V.
kaznakowi and V. dinniki (Fig. 13).
Yellow-greyish hues are prevalent. The
pattern is more homogeneous. The neck
transition is hardly expressed, like in V.
dinniki. It differs from V. ursini
eriwanensis by 1) a relatively high head, 2)
yellowish general coloration, 3) clear
contrasted pattern, and 4) special
pholidosis.
Sexual dimorphism. Maximum body size
is greater in females than males (Table 2).
Males have longer tails. Number of ventral
scales is greater in females (Fig. 14).
Number of subcaudal scales is greater in
males. Sexual dimorphism in color is not
recorded.
Vol. 3, p. 24
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
<fc* ' ■ k
FIG. 12. Vipera darevskii in the field.
Age variability. Newly born vipers are
uniquely colored.
Geographic range and ecology. The
species range shows relict characters. It
covers the southeast part of the submeridian
Dzhavakhetsky Ridge within the territory of
Armenia (here this ridge has the name
Mokrye (Wet) Mountains) and evidently
adjacent regions of Georgia (Fig. 1: 9).
Vertical distribution lies within a narrow
interval at elevations from 2600 (rarely
2500) to 3000 m on Mount Legli, Georgia.
It is a montane meadow subalpine species
inhabiting detritus slopes with great
amounts of big black outcrops of volcanic
rocks at angles of 35°-45° (Darevsky pers.
comm.). At recorded elevations, according
to Tumadzhanov (1980), subalpine
meadows (so called Transcaucasian oats
outcrops) are widely represented. It is a
leading formation on steep slopes with all
exposures which form the first stages of
invasion of bare rock outcrops.
Characteristic components of these
meadows are as follows: Festuca
woronowii, F. ovina, Bromopsis variegata,
B. villosula, and Carex tristis. Lower
along the slopes at elevations from 2300 to
2400 m the formations of transition
montane-meadow steppe are replaced by
montane Festuca valesidea and Stipa
(feather grass). From elevations of 2200 m
down to 1000 m Festuca valesiaca steppes
occur (Lavrenko 1980). Here in the
montane-steppe highland ecological belt,
Vipera ursini eriwanensis occurs in contact
with V. darevskii in the transition zone of
the meadow steppes.
The numbers of Vipera darevskii are not
great. To date it is known only from the
type locality cited as "Mount Legli", where
it occurs within a narrow band in subalpine
meadows. The species biology is nearly
unknown.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 25
FIG. 13. Polymorphism in Vipera dinniki from the population that occurs in the valley of the upper part
of the Mzymta River.
Discussion
Phytogeny and the history of present viper
distributions in the Vipera kaznakowi
complex in the Caucasus Isthmus.
The head of the vipers assigned to
Vipera berus, V. ursini, and the V.
kaznakowi complex (Fig. 15) is covered
with rectangular scales (the rostral, nasals,
nasal-rostrals, upper oculars, parietals, and
the frontal), unlike in V. lebetina, V.
xanthina, V. raddei, and V. persica. In the
latter species, small scales on the upper
head are typical.
Marx and Rabb (1965) consider these
characters important in the assessment of
phylogenetic relationships of the vipers.
On the basis of body vertebrae close
relationships and isolation of Vipera berus,
V. ursini and V. kaznakowi within the
genus Vipera have been proposed
(Chkhikvadze and Zerova 1983). They
restore the prior generic name of Pelias to
the vipers. Reuss (1935) noted the
isolation of the vipers that have large
regular head plates, on the basis of skull
kinesis and analysis of the head muscles.
Without going into extensive detail on the
taxonomic position of these vipers with
large regular head scales from the Euro-
Siberian group, we shall simply refer to
them as shield-headed vipers. These vipers
show great morphological resemblance.
They are share a common color pattern,
behavior, and reproductive biology.
We consider Vipera berus and V .
kaznakowi to be close relatives. These
vipers probably diverged from a mesophilic
form in the Miocene. Northern populations
tend to be restricted to humid biotypes up to
tundra areas, whereas for southern
populations, humid subtropical forests are
inhabited. In Kramer's (1961) book
concerning the taxonomy of V. ursini and
V. kaznakowi, in the chapter on phylogeny
and history of the vipers distribution, he
regards V. berus and V. ursini as a united
circle of races, a rassenkreis. Such facts
that V. ursini renardi was subspecifically
included in V. berus also emphasizes close
relationships of shield-headed vipers.
Vol. 3, p. 26
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 14. A female Vipera darevskii from the vicinity of Gukasyansky Region, Armenia (ZIN 19934).
Basoglu (1947) recognized the following
varieties within V. berus: berus, renardi,
ornata. His view point was criticized and
the V. ursini renardi was restored
(Terentyev and Chernov 1949; Mertens
1952 a, b). Kramer (1961) noted great
morphological resemblance in V. berus
and V. kaznakowi. He considered them
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 27
FIG. 15. The shield-headed vipers from the Caucasus, a. Vipera kaznakowi, b. V. dinniki, c. V. ursini
renardi, d. V. dinniki (Lagodekhi, Georgia. ZIN 8389).
phylogenetically close species and felt that
montane populations of the vipers played a
big role in the formation and isolation of the
forms. In his opinion, when it became cold
they were forced out of the mountains onto
the plains by glaciers. When the climate
became warm again, they retreated into the
mountains. In the mountains it was easy to
choose temperature and humidity optima,
whereas on the plains this was not
possible. Kramer felt that in some places
on the plains where refugia might be
present, the climate remained more or less
stable. For the vipers in the V. ursini
complex, Kramer suggests first separation
in the Miocene and Pliocene and later
independent development of the eastern and
western forms. The complex formation of
the climate and relief in the Caucasus
coincides with regular regressions and
transgressions of the sea. Breaks in links
between the faunas of the Caucasus and the
European platform, the Balkans and Turkey
stipulate emergence and isolation of original
viper forms, beginning with the Miocene
and Pliocene. At this time the formation of
the Caucasus as a montane country
occurred (Bogachev 1938). Schwarz
(1936) suggests that the viper fauna of the
Mediterranean islands are Miocene relicts.
Present ranges of shield-headed vipers in
Vol. 3, p. 28
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
the Caucasus have precise altitudinal and
ecological limits to their distributions.
They are supported by natural historic
events. Overlap of ranges occurs in
comparatively small areas. The
"kaznakowi "like vipers evidently invaded
the Caucasus during the Miocene from the
south, when the Caucasus island was
connected with Middle Asian land. The
southern invasion of the Caucasus in upper
Miocene by different mammal species was
observed by Vereschagin (1958); that of
lizards from the Podarchis-Archaeolacerta
groups was noted by Darevsky (1967).
Fossils of Vipera have been known in
Europe since the Miocene (Tatarinov
1964). Of the European Miocene fossils,
Provipera boettgeri Kinkelin 1892, was
described. Of those from lower Pliocene,
V. gedulyi Bolkay 1913, was described by
Marx and Rabb (1965). This was at about
the time the Caucasus Mountains were
formed (Bogachev 1938). A warm
subtropical climate which stimulated rich
development of mesophilic vegetation, and
contributed to the formation and wide
distribution of warmth and mesophilic
species like V. kaznakowi in the Caucasus,
including the Adzharo-Imeretinsky Ridge
where even until the Pliocene, bay trees,
rubber plants, araucarias and palms were
preserved (Vereschagin 1958). Different
mammal fossils: Middle Asian and
Caucasus hamsters, Mesocricetus,
Prometheomys, Sorex, and Talpa
(Vereschagin 1958) and also those of
insects: Orthoptera, Hemiptera, Blattoidea,
Coleoptera (Rodendorf 1939) testify to the
presence of good foodstuff for the shield-
headed vipers in the Miocene.
The end of the Tertiary period was
marked by a decrease in tectonics and with
the emergence of a broad link between the
Caucasus and the Balkans via the Crimea
(Vereschagin 1958). Steppes arose in
northern areas adjacent to the Black Sea
coast (Pidoplichko 1954; Scherbak 1966).
During this period an arid adapted
"urisini "-like viper associated with steppe
areas penetrated into western Precaucasia
from the east. It might have already
separated from Vipera ursini renardi and
have become widely distributed throughout
the plains area along the northern slope in
the Big Caucasus.
The middle-upper Pliocene, when the
ridges of both the Big and Small Caucasus
were subjected to considerable glaciation,
should be considered the beginning of the
initial break in the range of Vipera
kaznakowi (Markov et al. 1965). The
Kolchida (Colchis) had become a basic
nucleus in V. kaznakowi dispersal. There,
even in the epochs when it became severely
cold in the Pleistocene, a relatively warm-
loving vegetation of a Caucasus type was
preserved (Vereschagin 1958). Along with
Kolchida (Colchis) much smaller refugia
were sporadically preserved along the
Black Sea coast up to the town of
Lazorevskoye. The same is true for the
northern slope of the Main Caucasus Ridge
between the Pshekha and Malaya rivers.
This is supported by the present
distribution of the Tertiary vegetation of the
Kolchida (Colchis) type in the western
Caucasus (Adamyants 1971; Kharadze
1974; Pechorin and Lozovoy 1980;
Kholyavko et al. 1978; Tuniyev 1990, this
volume).
It is in the narrow humid canyons with a
relatively regular thermal regime that Vipera
kaznakowi is preserved. Also, isolated
populations might be preserved in midlands
where the refugia with Kolchida (Colchis)
vegetation are known in regions of the
Fisht-Oshterovsky Massive, the Lago-Naki
Plateau, and even in the Central Caucasus
(Kharadze 1974; Kholyavko et al. 1978).
Small refugia might also be preserved along
the southern slope of the eastern Big
Caucasus. Similar refugia for
Archaeolacerta were recorded by Darevsky
(1967). Most highland populations of V.
kaznakowi undoubtedly went extinct
during the glacial period. Those that were
preserved in refugia have been
accumulating unique characters. Data
obtained by Takhtadzhan (1946) and
Maruashvili (1956) reveal that in glacial
epochs, mean annual temperature never
dropped lower than 1.5-2.0°C, and the
amount of precipitation was never less than
1500-2000 mm. These data support the
proposed preservation of relictual V .
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 29
kaznakowi populations in the mountains.
Darevsky (1967) regards this argument
as proof that due to the development of
montane glaciers, a fundamental
reconstruction of all animals and plants in
these areas occured from premontane and
montane refugia. Lizards for example,
might have been preserved in the
Gagrinsky and Bzybsky ridges facing the
sea, along with other regions. The end of
the Pleistocene was marked by the
development of steppe landscapes on the
Zakubauskaya sloping plain along with
already formed landscapes and a
characteristic biological community of the
present type along the Black Sea coast of
the Caucasus (Vereschagin 1958). This
situation contributed to a much wider
dispersal of Vipera ursini renardi and
further preservation of V. kaznakowi.
During the xerothermal epoch in the
Holocene, intensive glacial melting and the
upwards elevational shift of vegetation belts
along the mountain slopes occurred
throughout the area. Within a considerable
area of the Caucasus, steppe landscapes
became prevalent. This allowed the steppe
animals, including the steppe viper, Vipera
ursini renardi, to ascend into the mountains
(Vereschagin 1958). At that time an initial
contact of V. ursini renardi with montane
relict populations of V. kaznakowi might
have occurred in the midmountains of the
Western Caucasus. This region is
presently inhabited by V. dinniki which
shows mixed morphologies of both V.
kaznakowi and V. ursini renardi. The
approximate ways of possible interaction
and characters are shown in Fig. 16.
Darevsky (1967) writes about the form-
building role of hybridization in the
Caucasus. He observes the genesis of new
forms in the lizard group Archaeolacerta.
Hybridogenity in Vipera dinniki is
problematic, whereas introgressing
hybridization in the zones of contact
between V. kaznakowi and V. dinniki is
presently not doubted, age interbreedings
apparently occurring in midmontane
populations of V. dinniki. For example, in
one of these populations associated with the
Mzymta River head, all the initial types of
vipers can be found (Fig. 15). In
premontane populations of V. kaznakowi
we have not found specimens which have
hybrid characters. Generally all
premontane populations of V. kaznakowi
show great homogeneity. In the eastern
range of V. dinniki the species is presently
disjunct geographically from the closely
related V. ursini renardi, but rare
individuals with an intermediate
morphology between these species are
present.
Mayr (1968), Borkin and Darevsky
(1980) and Solbrig and Solbrig (1982)
report on various types of hybridization.
For instance, it is recorded that hybrids
possessing vital capacity occur between
sympatric species. Some of these hybrids
are capable of recurrent crosses with one or
both parental forms. The fate of both
species between which hybridization occurs
is partially dependent on 1) the intensity of
hybridization occurring between them and
2) the level of genetic and ecological
sterility of hybrids (Solbrig and Solbrig
1982).
In most cases the hybrids themselves do
not have greater evolutionary significance.
Rather it is the products of recurrent
interbreeding between the hybrids and the
parental forms, i.e. the process of
introgressive hybridization, that may form
new taxa; i.e. the blending of genomes of
ancestral taxons, or "borrowing" of parts
from other genomes by means of
introgression of genes as a variant of
hybridogenic species formation (Mayr
1968; Borkin and Darevsky 1980).
After the xerothermal epoch, the climate
again became more humid. This fact
contributed to the restoration of the former
limits of the forest belt (Vereschagin 1958).
Throughout the subalpine belt along the
southern slope of the Main Caucasus Ridge
within the area from the Central Caucasus
up to the Fisht-Oshtenovsky Massive in the
west, subalpine meadows and montane
curved forests are widely developed
(Galushko 1974; Dolukhanov 1974;
Kharadze 1974; Kholyavko et al. 1978).
Vol. 3, p. 30
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
V. ursini eriwanensis
V. darevskii
I
FIG. 16. Model of the proposed genesis of the vipers from the Vipera kaznakowi complex.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 31
In the western part, this vegetation is
present along the northern slope. To the
east, it gradually changes to steppe
(Lavrenko 1980). Definite limits of the
subalpine belt in the area influenced by the
warm Black Sea mark the present
distributional limit of Vipera dinniki.
The final establishment of the present
climate stabilized the range of Vipera
kaznakowi and allowed the joining of
scattered populations from the refugia
within the given region. The favorable
conditions along the Black Sea coast made
it possible for V. kaznakowi to disperse
along warm river valleys up to
midmountains and for V. dinniki to
disperse along the northern slope of the Big
Caucasus to the east up to the Belshaya
Laba River head. Where V. kaznakowi
and V. dinniki distributions meet, and
those of V. dinniki and V. ursini renardi,
zones of secondary hybridization emerged.
In these zones the following is observed:
intergradation of characters, a high degree
of polymorphism, and the "plucking" of
specimens from the "initial" type. In these
populations the specimens are hard to
define.
Phenotypical diversity is great with
regard to the Mzymta River valley
(Fig. 15). Non-identified individuals
having characters of both Vipera ursini
renardi and V. kaznakowi are known from
a number of localities in the complex
eastern range of these vipers. We think that
the history of V. darevskii is also
connected with the invasion of V .
kaznakowi from the south during the
Miocene and its further wide dispersal
throughout the Caucasus. Vipera
kaznakowi apparently used to inhabit the
majority of the Maly (Small) Caucasus
area, including the Adzharo-Imeretinsky,
Meskhetsky, and Dzhavakhetsky ridges.
The fact that this range did exist in the past
is demonstrated by a relict population of V.
kaznakowi that occurs in Baniskhevsky
Canyon, Georgia and by the proposed
distribution of the vipers along the
Trialetsky Ridge (Bakradze 1969). The
latter might be a link between the areas
presently inhabited by the closely related
species, V. kaznakowi and V. darevskii.
In middle Pliocene, Vipera kaznakowi
apparently invaded the Dzhavakhetsky
Ridge (the Mokrye [Wet] Mountains). At
that time the hot, arid climate of the region
was replaced by a more humid, cool
climate. Later on, however, beginning
with the middle Pleistocene, processes of
aridization and glaciation caused the final
degradation of forests (Agakhanyants
1981). By that time the diverged vipers
were restricted to the highest places in the
mountains where maximum humidity could
be found. At the same time the newly
formed steppe areas were actively invaded
by V. ursini eriwanensis (Reuss 1935)
from the Anatolyskoye Plateau. Later on
the viper became widely distributed
throughout the entire montane-steppe belt in
the Small Caucasus and the Armyanskoye
Plateau. At that site one more source of
hybridization, including further form-
building, evidently existed. The genesis of
V. darevskii can be explained by the
hybridization of V. ursini eriwanensis and
V. kaznakowi that split from its major
range in the vicinity of the Mokrye
Mountains (Plate 3).
Apparently, introgression of genes from
Vipera ursini eriwanensis which essentially
surrounded a small Pleistocene population
of V. kaznakowi was very substantial.
Morphological propinquity of V. darevskii
to V. ursini eriwanensis and V. kaznakowi
support its possible hybrid genesis (Borkin
and Darevsky 1980). It goes without
saying that further ecological, ethological,
cytological and biochemical research of
these vipers is needed to prove it.
Similarly, Agakhanyants (1981) explains
the floristic richness of the region by a
complex interaction of invaders from the
south and north in the highlands of the
Small Caucasus. Further aridization of the
climate caused the mesophilic form of V.
darevskii to ascend into the mountains.
Ecological disconnection in the present
high-altitude belts caused complete
separation of V. darevskii and V. ursini
eriwanensis.
The presence of "kaznakowi " -like
Vol. 3, p. 32
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
vipers in Lagodekhi and other regions of
the Big Caucasus may be accounted for
solely by changes in climate in refugia that
preserved populations and further
divergence in isolated montane canyons. A
number of isolated populations might by
modified due to hybridization with Vipera
ursini renardi in a manner similar to the
above listed scheme.
During the period of xerophytization in
the Holocene, breaks within the range of
Vipera kaznakowi occurred. At that time
isolated populations existed over a long
period. A number of populations in
hydrophilous epochs to follow, would have
been capable of connecting many times.
This is supported by the restoration of the
former forest belt after Holocene
xerophytization (Galushko 1974; Kharadze
1974). Pleistocene glaciation obviously
also influenced the emergence of isolated
populations and changes in the
distributional limits (Markov et al. 1965).
Acknowledgments
The assistance of many people
contributed to the completion of this study.
We would like to extend our special
recognition to II ya S. Darevsky and Natalia
B. Ananjeva from the Leningrad Zoological
Institute, USSR Academy of Sciences who
aided us in the collection of data, analysis
of the material, and preparation of this
manuscript We are grateful to Valentina F.
Orlova from the Zoological Museum, the
Moscow State University and Valery I.
Vedmederja from the Museum of Natural
History, the University of Kharkav,
Ukraine for providing an opportunity to
work with systematic museum collections.
Illustrative assistance was provided by
Rostislav A. Danov.
Literature Cited
ADAMYANTS, G. I. 1971. [On Castanetum of the
Caucasus]. Reports of the Sochi Department of
the USSR Geographic Society, Science
Publishing, Leningrad. Issue 2:398-404. (In
Russian).
AGAKHANYANTS.O. Y. 1981. [Arid mountains
of the USSR]. Mysl Publishing, Moscow.
270 pp. (In Russian).
ANONYMOUS. 1978. [Red Data Book of the
USSR]. Lesnaya Promyshlennost Publishing,
Moscow. (In Russian).
ANONYMOUS. 1984. [Red Data Book of the
USSR]. Lesnaya Promyshlennost Publishing,
Moscow. (In Russian).
BAKRADZE, M. A. 1969. [New data on the range
of the Caucasus viper {Vipera kaznakowi
Nikolsky) in Georgia]. Academic Press,
Tbilisi, Georgia 56(2):467-468. (In Russian).
BAKRADZE, M. A. 1975. [Distribution of Vipera
laurenti in south Georgia]. Bulletin of the State
Museum of Georgia, Tbilisi 28a:41 1-412. (In
Russian).
BANNIKOV, A. G. AND V. M. MAKEYEV. 1976.
[Conservation of venomous snakes of the
USSR]. Priroda Publishing, Moscow 5:71-83.
(In Russian).
BANNIKOV, A. G., I. S. DAREVESKY, V. G.
ISCHENKO, A. K. RUSTAMOV, AND N. N.
SCHERBAK. 1977. [Field guide of the USSR
amphibians and reptiles]. Prosveschenye
Publishing, Moscow. 414 pp. (In Russian).
BARAN, J. 1977. Tiirkiye Gilanlamin Taxonomik
Revizyonu ve cografi Dagilislari. TBAK,
Ankara. TBAK ser. 9, n. 309.
BARTENEV, A. N. AND M. A. REZNIKOVA.
1935. [Papers on the fauna of amphibians and
reptiles from the western and central parts of the
State Caucasus Reserve]. Bulletin of the
Museum of Georgia, Tbilisi 8:11-41. (In
Russian).
BASOGLU, M. 1947. On some varieties of Vipera
berus from the extreme north-eastern Anatolia.
Rev. Fac. Sci. Univ. Istanbul. (B), 12/1:182-
190.
BASOGLU, M. AND J. BARAN. 1977. Tiirkiye
siiriingleri Kism. I. Gilandar. The Reptiles of
Turkey. Part II. The snakes. Bomova-Izmir Ege
Universitesi Matbaasi. 205 pp.
BOETTGER, O. 1893. Katalog der Reptilien-
sammlung im Museum der Senckenbergischen
Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Frankfurt am
Main. Frankffurt a. M. Teil 1-2. 160 pp.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 33
BOETTGER, O. 1899 Reptillia et Batrachia. Pp.
274-294. In Radde, Die sammlungen der
Kaukasischen Museums, I, Zoologie, Tiflis.
Caucasus Department of the Russian
Geographic Society, Vladikavkaz 32(5):9-10.
(In Russian).
BOGACHEV, V. V. 1938. [On the zoogeography
of the Caucasus and its geological history].
Bulletin of the Azerbajzhan Affiliation of the
USSR Academy of Sciences, Baku no. 4:29-47.
(In Russian).
BORKIN, L. Y. AND I. S. DAREVSKY. 1980.
[Hybridogenic species formation in vertebrates].
Journal of General Biology, Moscow 41 (4):485-
505. (In Russian).
BOZHANSKY, A. T. 1979. [Distribution and daily
activity of the Caucasus viper on southern
slopes of the Big Caucasus]. Pp. 15-80. In
Materials of the Second All Union Conference
of Young Scientists on Conservation of Fauna
and Flora, preserved at VNIIITEISH. Moscow.
N. 100. (In Russian).
BOZHANSKY, A. T. 1983. [Territory relationships
in groupings of the Caucasus viper]. Pp. 90-
91. In Behavior of Animals in Communities.
Materials of the Third All Union Conference on
Animal Behavior, Moscow, Vol. 11. (In
Russian).
BOZHANSKY, A. T. 1984. [The Caucasus viper].
Priroda, Moscow 41(6):53-55. (In Russian).
CHERNOV, S. A. 1929. [Materials on the fauna
of Amphibia and Reptilia of highland
Ingushetia]. Bulletin of the Ingushsky Research
Institute of Natural Study, Vladikavkaz 2:93-
110. (In Russian).
CHKHIKVADZE, V. M. AND G. A. ZEROVA.
1983. [Morphology of body vertebrae and
systematic position of some viper snakes].
Reports of the Academy of Sciences of Georgia,
Tbilisi 112(3):653-656. (In Russian).
DAREVSKY, I. S. 1956. [A new species of the
venomous snake, Vipera Icaznakowi Nikolsky,
for the fauna of Armenia]. Bulletin of the
Academy of Sciences of Armenia, Yerevan
9(12): 127- 130. (In Russian).
DAREVSKY, I. S. 1967. [Rock lizards from the
Caucasus (Lacerta saxicola )]. Science
Publishing House, Leningrad. 214 pp. (In
Russian).
DINNIK, N., Y. 1902. [The upper reaches of the
Malaya Laba and Mzymta rivers]. The West
DINNIK, N. Y. 1926. [Snakes of the Northern
Caucasus]. Scientific Notes of the Northern
Caucasus Institute of Natural Study,
Vladikavkaz 1:11-17. (In Russian).
DOLUKHANOV, A. G. 1974. [Subalpine
landscapes of the Caucasus as shelters for relict
fauna elements]. Problems of Botanies,
Leningrad 12:27-34. (In Russian).
FYODOROV, S. M. 1956. [Reptiles, amphibians,
Cyclostomata, and fishes of Stavropolsky
Territory]. Pp. 205-220. In Materials of the
Study of Stavropolsky Territory, Stavropol,
Issue 8. (In Russian).
GALUSHKO, A. I. 1974. [Relicts of the highland
flora of the western part of the Central
Caucasus]. Pp. 19-26. In Problems of
Botanies, Vol. 12, Flora of Highlands and its
Exploration. Science Publishing Leningrad.
(In Russian).
HARDING, K. A. AND K. R. G. WELCH. 1980.
Venomous snakes of the world. A checklist.
Pergamon Press, Riverside, New Jersey. 188
pp.
KHARADZE, A. L. 1974. [On some floristic
groups of endemics of the Big Caucasus]. Pp.
70-75. In Problems of Botanies, Vol. 12,
Flora of Highlands and its Exploration, Science
Publishing, Leningrad. (In Russian).
KHOLYAVKO, V. S., D. A. GOLBA-
MIKHAYLENKO AND Y. S. KHOLYARKO.
1978. [Atlas of arborious races of the
Caucasus]. Lesnaya Promyshlennost
Publishing, Moscow. 215 pp. (In Russian).
KLEMMER, D. 1963. Liste der rezenten
Giftschlangen. Elapidae, Hydrophiidae,
Viperidae und Crotalidae. Pp. 255-464. In
Behringwerk-Mitteil. Die Giftschlangen der
Erde. Marburg/Lahn.
KNOEPFLER P. S. AND E. SOCHUREK. 1955.
Neues iiber Rassen der Wiesenotter.
Burgenlandische Heimatbiatter 4: 1 85-1 88.
KOROSTELYOV, N. A. 1933. [Climatic sketch of
the Black Sea coast of the Caucasus]. Pp. 143-
168. In The Black Sea Coast of the Caucasus.
In Standardization and Rationalization,
Vol. 3, p. 34
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Moscow-Leningrad. (In Russian).
KRAMER E. 1961. Variation,
Sexualdimorphismus, Wachstum und
Taxonomie von Vipera ursini (Bonaparte,
1835) und Vipera kaznakowi Nikolsky 1909.
Revue Suisse de Zoologie 61:627-725.
KRASOVSKY, D. 1929. [Materials on the fauna of
Reptilia et Amphibia of Khasav-Yurt region of
Dagestan]. Bulletin of the Gorsky Pedagogical
Institute, Makhachkala 6:175-200. (In
Russian).
KRASOVSKY, D. 1932. [Materials on the fauna of
terrestrial vertebrates of Rutulsky Kanton of
Dagestan]. Bulletin of the Second Northern
Caucasus Pedagogical Institute 10:89-95. (In
Russian).
LAVRENKO, Y. M. 1980. [Caucasus montane and
meadow steppes and stepped meadows]. Pp.
269-272. In Vegetation of the European part of
the USSR, Science Publishing, Leningrad. (In
Russian).
LEISTER, A. F. 1908a. [On the geographic range
of V. renardi Christoph and Vipera berus L.
within the Caucasus]. Works of the Kharkov
Society of Nature Researches at the Royal
University of Kharkov, Kharkov 42:3-7. (In
Russian).
LEISTER, A. F. 1908b. [New data on the
herpetology of the Terskaya region]. Bulletin of
the Caucasus Museum, Tiflis, Georgia 1-
4(4):209-217. (In Russian).
LEISTER, A. F. 1908c. [On the fauna of the
Erivan region. Notes on findings of the steppe
viper Vipera renardi Christoph in
Transcaucasis]. Pp. 223-226. In Press of the
Erivan Regional Statistics Committee, Erivan,
Armenia. (In Russian).
MARKOV, K. K., G. I. LAZUKOV, AND V. A.
NIKOLA YEV. 1965. [The Caucasus]. Pp. 306-
321. In Quaternary Period, v. 1, Territory of
the USSR, part 2. Area of Ancient Glaciation
of High Mountains of the USSR South, chapter
2, Moscow University Press, Moscow. (In
Russian).
MARUASHVILI, L. I. 1956. [The reason to review
the present day concepts about
paleogeographical conditions of the glacier
period in the Caucasus]. Press of the Institute
of Geography named after Vakhushti, Tbilisi,
Georgia. 113 pp. (In Russian).
MARX H. AND G. RABB. 1965. Relationships
and zoogeography of the Viperine snakes
(Family Viperidae). Chicago Natural History
Museum 44(21): 161-206.
MAYR, E. 1968. [Zoological species and
evolution]. Moscow 597 pp. (In Russian).
MENfiTRlfiS, E. 1832. Catalogue raisonnddes
objects zoologiques de Caucase. St.
Petersbourg, Academy Imperial, des sciences.
272 pp.
MERTENS, R. 1952a. Amphibien und Reptilien
aus der Tiirkei. Rev. Fac. Sci. Istanbul (B),
17:41-75.
MERTENS, R. 1952b. Nachtrag zu "Amphibien
und Reptilien aus der Tiirkei". Rev. Fac. Sci.
Univ. Istanbul (B) 17:353-355.
MERTENS R. AND H. WERMUTH. 1960. Die
Amphibien und Reptilien Europas. Dritte
Liste, nach dem Stand vom 1 Januar 1960,
Frankfurt a. Main. 264 pp.
MILYANOVSKY, Y. S. 1957. [On the snake fauna
of Abkhazia]. Works of the State Museum of
Abkhazia, Sukhumi, Tbilisi 2:199-203. (In
Russian).
MORITS, L. D. 1916. [On the snakes of the
Northern Caucasus]. Wildlife Hobbyist,
Petrograd, Russia 1-2:1-21. (In Russian).
MUSKHELISHVILI, T. A. 1959. [On the
herpetofauna of Svanetia]. Report of the
Academy of Sciences of Georgia, Tbilisi
22(6):729-831. (In Russian).
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1905. [Reptiles and
amphibians of the Russian Empire
(Herpetologica Rossica)]. Press of the Western
Empire Academy of Sciences, Ser 8, 17(1): 1-
517. (In Russian).
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1909. [A new viper species
from the Caucasus, Vipera kaznakowi.]
Bulletin of the Caucasus Museum, Tiflis Nos
3,4:173-174. (In Russian).
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1911. [Reptiles and
amphibians of the Caucasus]. The Caucasus
Museum Press, Tiflis, Georgia 10(1): 1-18. (In
Russian.)
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 35
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1913. [Reptiles and
amphibians of the Caucasus]. The Caucasus
Museum Press, Tiflis, Georgia 272 pp. (In
Russian).
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1916. [Reptiles. The fauna of
Russia and adjacent countries, II, Ophidia].
Academic Press, Petrograd. 350 pp. (In
Russian).
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUNIYEV. 1986.
[Present ranges, possible ways of their
formation and phylogeny of the three species of
vipers from the Eurosiberic group (V .
kaznakowi complex) in the Caucasus].
Proceedings of the Zoological Institute, USSR
Academy of Sciences, Leningrad 157:104-135.
(In Russian).
ORLOVA, V. F. 1973. [Herpetofauna of the
northern area of the State Caucasus Reserve].
Zoological News, Kiev, Ukraine (2):61-65. (In
Russian).
PECHORIN, A. I. AND S. P. LOZOVOY. 1980.
[Natural monuments of the Krasnodar Territory].
Krasnodar Press, Krasnodar (2): 1-138. (In
Russian).
PIDOPLICHKO, I. G. 1954. [On the glacier
period]. The Ukraine Academy of Sciences
Press, Kiev, Ukraine. 139 pp. (In Russian).
REUSS.T. 1935. Erlauterungen zur Typenfrage in
der Zoologie an Hand von Bildem europaischer
Giftschlangen. Nach. Bl. Aquar. u. Terr. Ver.,
Berlin 16:215-218.
RODENDORF, B. B. 1939. [On the Miocene fauna
of insects in the vicinity of Voroshilovsk].
Priroda Publishing, Moscow, N. 12. (In
Russian).
ROSSIKOW, K. N. 1890. [In the mountains of the
northwestern Caucasus. A trip to Zaakdan and
the Bolshaya Laba River head for the purpose of
zoogeographic research]. Bulletin of the
Imperial Russian Geographic Society. 1:1-198.
(In Russian).
ROSTOMBEKOV, V. N. 1939. [On the
herpetofauna of Abkhazia]. Bulletin of the
Abkhazian Affiliation of the Academy of
Sciences, Sukhumi, Georgia. 1:117-217. (In
Russian).
SCHERBAK, N. N. 1966.
reptiles of the Crimea].
[Amphibians and
Naukora Dumka
Publishing House, Kiev, Ukraine. 239 pp. (In
Russian).
SCHWARZ, E. 1936. Untersuchungen tiber die
Systematik und Verbreitung der europaischen
und mediterranien Ottern. Behringwerk Mitteil.,
Marburg 7:159-162.
SELYANINOV, G. T. 1933. [Sketch on the
climate of Krasnaya Polyana (Red Meadow).]
Pp. 169-201. In The Black Sea Coast of the
Caucasus. Moscow-Leningrad. (In Russian).
SHKADOVA, A. K. 1979. [Temperature regime of
terrains on the territory of the USSR].
Gidrometeoizdat Publishing, Leningrad. 240
pp. (In Russian).
SILANTYEV, A. 1903. [Materials on the
herpetology of the Black Sea region]. Annual
Journal of the Zoological Museum, Academy of
Sciences, St. Petersbourg, Russia 8:1-10. (In
Russian).
SOLBRIG, O., AND D. SOLBRIG. 1982. [Biology
and evolution of populations]. Mir Publishing,
Moscow. 488 pp. (In Russian).
TAKHTADZHAN, A. L. 1946. [On the history of
the vegetation developments in Armenia].
Works of the Botanic Institute, Armenian
Academy of Sciences, Yerevan, Armenia. 4:51-
107. (In Russian).
TATARINOV, L. P. 1964. [Order Ophidia,
snakes]. Pp. 484-493. In Fundamentals of
Paleontology. Reptiles, Amphibians and Birds.
Science Publishing, Moscow. (In Russian).
TERENTYEV, P. V. AND S. A. CHERNOV. 1949.
[Guide to reptiles and amphibians]. Soviet
Sciences Publishing, Moscow. 315 pp. (In
Russian)
TERTYSHNIKOV, M. F. 1977 [Ecological and
zoogeographic characteristics of the herpetofauna
of the Northern Caucasus]. Fauna of
StavTopolsky Territory, Stavropol, Issue 11:3-
25. (In Russian).
TSAREVSKY, S. F. 1916. [New forms of vipers
from within the Russian Empire]. Pp. 32-38 In
Annual Journal of the Zoological Museum of
the Imperial Academy of Sciences, St.
Petersburg. (In Russian).
TUMADZHANOV, 1. 1. 1980. [Caucasus meadows
and curved forests]. Pp. 198-202. In
Vol. 3, p. 36
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Vegetation of the European Part of the USSR,
Science Publishing, Leningrad. (In Russian).
TUNTYEV, B.S. 1990. On the independence of the
Colchis center of amphibian and reptile
speciation. Asiatic Herpetological Research
3:67-84
VEDMEDERJA, V. I. 1977. [New data on the
herpetofauna of Adzharia]. Pp. 54-55. In
Questions of Herpetology. Abstracts of the
Report at Fourth All Union Conference of
Herpetology, Science Press, Leningrad. (In
Russian).
VEDMEDERJA, V. I. 1984. [Range, variability and
peculiarities of ecology of the Caucasus viper].
Pp. 8-9. In Species and its Productivity in the
Habitat. Part V. Questions of Herpetology,
Sverdlovsk. (In Russian).
VEDMEDERJA, V. I., N. L. ORLOV AND B. S.
TUNIYEV. 1986. [On the taxonomy of three
viper species of the Vipera kaznakowi
complex]. Proceedings of the Zoological
Institute, Leningrad 157:55-61. (In Russian).
VERESCHAGIN, N. K. 1958. [Genesis of the
terrain fauna of the Caucasus Isthmus]. Pp.
506-514. In Fauna of the USSR, Vol. 5.
Montane Areas of the European Part of the
USSR, Academic Press, Moscow. (In
Russian).
ZINYAKOVA, M. P. AND A. G. TROFIMOV.
1977. [On the biology of reproduction of the
Caucasus viper, Vipera kaznakowi Nikolsky].
P. 95. In Questions of Herpetology. Abstracts
of the Report at the Fourth All Union
Conference of Herpetology, Science Publishing,
Leningrad. (In Russian).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 37-45
Studies on Hynobiid Salamanders, With Description of a New Genus
KRAIG ADLER1 AND ERMI ZHAO2
^Cornell University, Section of Neurobiology and Behavior, Mudd Hall, Ithaca, New York 14853, USA
2Chengdu Institute of Biology, P.O. Box 416, Academia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Abstract. -The types of Hynobius chinensis Giinther, 1889, were reexamined and are redescribed; the
known range in China is mapped. Hynobius yiwuensis Cai, 1985, is relegated to the synonymy of
chinensis. Hynobius retardatus Dunn, 1923, of Japan, differs markedly from all other Hynobius and is
here placed in a new genus (Satobius ). The new genus is characterized and compared to the other eight
genera of hynobiids.
Key words: Amphibia, Caudata, salamanders, Hynobiidae, Hynobius, Satobius, China, Japan.
Introduction
As part of our work on a handbook of
Chinese amphibians and reptiles, we have
had to re-study certain Chinese hynobiid
salamanders described in the literature and
consider their relationships to extralimital
species, especially those native to Japan.
This paper is a result of these current
investigations and concerns the identity and
distribution of Hynobius chinensis
Giinther, 1889, the taxonomic status of H.
yiwuensis Cai, 1985, and the proper
generic status of a Japanese species, H.
retardatus Dunn, 1923.
Results and Discussion
1. Identity and Distribution of
Hynobius chinensis Giinther, 1889
In 1889, Albert Giinther described
Hynobius chinensis from two specimens
collected in Hubei Province. Previously,
Hynobius species had been known only
from Japan and Korea, thus Gunther's
records from central China were quite
isolated from the ranges of the then-known
species. Since 1889, however, no other
specimens of Hynobius have been reported
from Hubei, despite much collecting there,
leading Zhao and Hu (1983, English
translation 1988) to suggest that either the
locality data for Gunther's specimens are
wrong or that chinensis is not, in fact, a
species of Hynobius.
We have examined Gunther's two
syntypes (British Museum [Nat. Hist.]
numbers 1946.9.6.54 and .55, formerly
catalogued as 1889.6.25-26). Both are
females, as judged from the external
appearance of their cloacae (the specimens
are too hardened to examine internally).
Based on our examination of the types,
H. chinensis is a true Hynobius as defined
by Zhao and Hu (1984, English translation
1988). Since Gunther's (1889) original
description is brief, we provide the
following redescription: Head large, its
length from snout to gular fold longer than
its width (15.2 x 10.6 mm; 12.8 x 9.5
mm); tip of snout rounded. Eyes are
dorsolateral in position, slighdy protruded;
diameter of eye shorter than the distance
from its anterior corner to the tip of snout;
pupil rounded. Nostril between eye and tip
of snout, and slightly closer to the latter;
distance between nostrils slightly larger or
equal to the distance between eyes. A "V"-
shaped bulge on top of head. No labial
fold. An indistinct gular fold. Angle of
jaw just behind the posterior corner of eye.
Both maxilla and mandible with tiny teeth.
Tongue elliptical, large, almost covering the
entire floor of mouth. Series of vomerine
teeth " 1/ "-shaped, the outer branch
comprising 6-9 and inner branch 11-15
teeth; the angle formed by outer and inner
branches just beyond the anterior margin of
choanae; inner branches much longer than
the outer ones and extending backwards to
the level of the middle of eye ball; the
1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 38
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 1. Map of central China illustrating all known localities for Hynobius chinensis. The inset shows
the location of the more detailed map. Locality records in Zhejiang and Fujian provinces are noted by solid
circles; the star-shaped symbol in Hubei Province is the type locality (Yichang). Other localities mentioned
in the text are noted by hollow circles; some major cities are added for reference. The river mapped in
Sichuan Province (upstream from Chongqing) that is continuous with the Chang Jiang (Yangtze River) is
known variously as the Dajin, Dadu, and Min.
posterior ends of two inner branches close
but do not meet at midline. Body short and
stout; limbs well developed and tips of
digits meet when limbs adpressed. Costal
grooves 11, very prominent and meeting on
ventral midline. Fingers four, 2-3-4-1 in
order of length, the first finger almost equal
in length to the fourth. Toes five, 3-4-2-5-
1 in order of length. Digits flattened, free;
without palmar and tarsal tubercles; no
cornified covering on palms, tarsa, fingers,
and toes. Tail length shorter than snout-
vent length; tail compressed, but cylindrical
at the base and pointed at the end, without
crest on ventral edge and only slightly so
on its dorsal side. Skin smooth. The
dimensions cannot be re-measured due to
the specimens' hardened condition; only
head length and width can be given
(above). Further details about the types are
given in Zhao and Adler (1989). Cai et al.
(1985) have described the embryonic
development and larval features of
chinensis.
Lectotype: We hereby designate BMNH
1946.9.6.54 as the lectotype of H .
chinensis.
Type Locality: Gunther (1889) stated
that "two specimens were collected by Mr.
Pratt at Ichang [=Yichang]." (Here and
below, modern spellings of place names,
where different, are given in brackets. All
localities are mapped in Fig. 1.) A. E. Pratt
explored China during 1887-1890 and
summarized his experiences in a book
(1892). As Gunther noted in the appendix
to Pratt's book, herpetological specimens
were collected at various localities in Hubei
and Sichuan provinces, and he repeated the
"Ichang" locality for the two Hynobius
specimens. Pope and Boring (1940),
however, stated that "Mell ('29) claims that
Pratt's records from 'Ichang' were
collected in the mountains south of the
Yangtze River near Changyang."
Curiously, no such paper by Mell is listed
in the bibliography of Pope and Boring's
monograph, nor can we find such a
statement in any of Mell's publications, so
we are unable to verify the basis of Pope
and Boring's information attributed to Mell.
In his book, Pratt (1892) mentioned
finding salamanders only twice (pages 179
and 224) but both localities are in Sichuan:
a lake above Ta-tsien-lu [=Kangding], at
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 39
14,070 feet elevation, and at Kia-ting-fu
[=Leshan], both of which are localities far
to the west of Yichang (see Fig. 1). Four
other new species of reptiles and
amphibians were described by Gunther in
his 1889 paper, all having "Ichang" as then-
type locality, and for these taxa the locality
has never been questioned, to our
knowledge. Thus, we are inclined to
accept the type locality as stated by
Gunther, until new evidence comes to
hand, although this locality is about 700-
900 km west of the other known localities
for this species (see Fig. 1 and below).
Distribution: Subsequent to Giinther's
report, several other specimens of H .
chinensis have been reported. Here we
summarize all known records (see Fig. 1):
Fujian: Kuatun [=Guadun, 27° 42' N
117° 50' E, a town at Mt. Wuyi],
Ch'ungan Hsien [=Chong'an County, 27°
46' N 118° 01'E] (Pope, 1931).
Hubei: Ichang [=Yichang, 30° 42' N 111°
17' E] (Gunther, 1889).
Zhejiang: Dachen, 29° 28' N 120° 06' E,
140 m, and Chalin, (both in Yiwu County,
29° 18' N 120° 04' E), Zhenhai, 29°
57' N 121° 42' E, and Xiaoshan, 30°
10' N 120° 15' E, (Cai, 1985; types of
H. yiwuensis); Wenling, 28° 22' N 121°
22' E, 1500 ft., (Boring and Chang, 1933;
Chang, 1933).
Boring and Chang's specimens from
Zhejiang Province have been examined and
their identifications verified. Cai's species,
H . yiwuensis, is a synonym of H .
chinensis (see section 2, below). Thus,
chinensis is the only Hynobius found in
mainland China, except for two species in
the extreme northeast; three other species
are endemic to Taiwan.
2. Taxonomic Status of
Hynobius yiwuensis Cai, 1985
Cai (1985) described Hynobius
yiwuensis as new, based upon a series of
adults (16 males, 11 females), juveniles,
larvae, and eggs from Zhejiang Province.
Unfortunately, he was unable to compare
his specimens directly with the types of H.
chinensis. Based on our comparison with
those types, however, we believe that the
two taxa are synonymous. We base our
conclusion primarily on the six features
used by Cai to diagnose his new form.
Vomerine Teeth. Cai described the length
of the inner branch of vomerine teeth in
yiwuensis as longer than that of chinensis,
yet our examination reveals no significant
difference. Moreover, the shape of the
vomerine teeth series is very similar and the
numbers of teeth in both the inner and outer
branches are within the same ranges in the
two forms.
Head and Body Proportions. Cai stated
that in yiwuensis the head is much longer
than broad, in contrast to Giinther's
measurements for one specimen in which
the length was only slightly greater (11 x
10 mm). Our re-measurement of Giinther's
specimens, taking snout to gular fold as
head length, shows that in both types of
chinensis the head is much longer than
broad (see measurements in section 1,
above). Cai also claimed that chinensis and
yiwuensis differ somewhat in body
proportions, the latter being less stout. Our
comparisons failed to notice significant
differences, when relative sizes are taken
into account.
Adpressed Limbs. In both types of
chinensis, the tips of the digits touch when
the limbs are adpressed, but Cai's
diagnosis states that in yiwuensis the tips
usually do not touch. However, in Cai's
specimens there is variation in this character
and in about one third of them the tips of
the digits do meet
Costal Grooves. In his diagnosis, Cai
stated that yiwuensis has 10 costal grooves,
in contrast to chinensis which has 1 1 . We
have confirmed the presence of 1 1 in the
types of chinensis. However, in Cai's type
series there are a few individuals having 1 1
costal grooves, as Cai himself even noted
(1985, p. 110). In a series of ten
specimens of chinensis from Wenling,
about 160 km southeast of Cai's type
Vol. 3, p. 40
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 1 . Comparison of the genera of hynobiid salamanders. See text for further details.
Bairachuperus* Hynobius Ltua
Onychodactylus Pachy hynobius* Pachypalaminus* Ranodon* Salamandrella Saiobtus
'Batrachuperus includes Paradaclylodon, Pachyhynobius includes Xenobius. and Randon includes Pseudohynobius. According to some authorities Pachypataminus is a synonym of
Hynobms (Nishio el al.. 1987).
locality, the number of costal grooves
varied from 10 to 12 (Chang, 1933).
Tail Proportions. Cai noted that the tail of
yiwuensis is compressed, with fin folds
especially distinct in the males, whereas
Gunther stated that chinensis was without a
tail crest. Gunther did not mention the
sexes of his two specimens, which are both
females (see section 1), and this was not
known to Cai. Thus, we believe that the
differences in the tail may be due to sexual
dimorphism and, in addition, perhaps also
to further elaboration of the crests during
the breeding season.
Color Pattern. Giinther's description was
based on specimens that had been
preserved for some time. Moreover, Cai
noted that the color pattern changes during
the breeding season, when it becomes
lighter and mostly green in color.
Nevertheless, our comparisons of the two
forms do not reveal any striking
differences.
Further details of our comparison
between the types of chinensis and Cai's
specimens of yiwuensis are given in Zhao
and Adler (1989). In summary, we believe
that all of these specimens represent a
single taxon which, because of the priority
of Giinther's name, must be designated
Hynobius chinensis.
3. Generic Status of
Hynobius retardatus Dunn, 1923
The identity of this Japanese species was
first recognized by E. R. Dunn, who
briefly characterized it (Dunn, 1923a) and
soon described it in more detail (Dunn,
1923b). The animal itself had been known
to Japanese biologists since at least 1907
under the names Hynobius fuscus, H.
lichenatus, and H. nigrescens. These
names, however, are now known to be
properly applied to species found elsewhere
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 41
in Japan (fuscus is a synonym of
nigrescens). Dunn (1923a) noted that H.
retardatus was a "well-marked species"
and, as knowledge of this animal increased
in succeeding years, its distinctiveness
from other Hynobius and hynobiids
generally became more apparent.
In 1932, Makino reported that H.
retardatus has a diploid somatic
chromosome number of 40, but since the
comparable numbers for most other
hynobiids were not known at that time, the
full significance of this very low number
was not recognized. In fact, retardatus has
by far the lowest number of chromosomes
in the family Hynobiidae (Table 1). Only
in 1943, with Sato's magnificent review of
Japanese salamanders, in which he
included a special comparative study of
their chromosomes, could the matter be
properly evaluated, and Sato himself
(1943, p. 489) suggested that retardatus
might be worthy of generic rank.
Unfortunately, Sato's premature death in
August 1945, during the atomic bombing
of Hiroshima (for a biography of Sato, see
Adler, 1989), prevented him from pursuing
this matter. In subsequent years, additional
data on anatomy, karyology, and biology
have accumulated which further support the
separation of retardatus into a new genus,
which we name:
Satobius, new genus
Type Species: Hynobius retardatus
Dunn, 1923a.
Content: A single species.
Diagnosis: A genus of hynobiid
salamanders (family Hynobiidae)
characterized by very long limbs and toes
(tips of digits of adpressed limbs overlap
+ 1 to +4 intercostal spaces in adults); a
very long tail (in adults, 100 to 118% of
head and body length combined); a long
neck and small head; no premaxillary
fontanelle or basi branchial radii; two short
series of vomerine teeth arranged in
transverse arcs between the internal nares;
vomer sutured to anterior end of
parasphenoid; lungs present; diploid (2«)
chromosome number of 40; larval duration
of one year or more (neoteny sometimes
occurs); and both terrestrial and aquatic
habits in adults during non-breeding
season.
These characteristics are discussed
below and, for easy access, are tabulated
for each of the nine genera of hynobiid
salamanders (Table 1).
Costal Grooves. These vertical grooves on
the side of the body correspond to the
position of ribs and, thus, to trunk
vertebrae; generally, the number of costal
grooves that can be counted is one less than
the number of trunk vertebrae.
The typical number of costal grooves in
5. retardatus is 11. In the Japanese species
of Hynobius the modal numbers of grooves
range from 11 to 13 (Misawa, 1989) and
some mainland species have as many as 14
(Dunn, 1923b). For species in other
hynobiid genera, the modal numbers of
costal grooves range from 10 to 14.
Adpressed Limbs. As a relative measure of
limb length, the minimum distance between
the tips of the digits is determined with the
limbs adpressed along the sides of the
body. Distances are then measured in
intercostal spaces, the fleshy folds between
adjacent costal grooves.
In metamorphosed adults of 5 .
retardatus the intercostal distance between
the digits of adpressed limbs is +1 to +4;
that is, because the limbs and toes are very
long, the digits actually overlap by one to
four intercostal spaces. Proportionately,
these are the longest limbs found in any
member of the entire family. In species of
Hynobius, this measurement ranges from 5
to +3; among hynobiids other than
Hynobius and Satobius, the longest limbs
are found in Pachypalaminus (-2 to 0), but
the toes are shorter than those of Satobius.
Tail. The tail of 5. retardatus, as measured
from posterior angle of the vent, is longer
than the combined measurements of head
plus body length. In adults, tail length
varies from 100 to 118% of head-body
Vol. 3, p. 42
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
length, whereas in all other hynobiids it is
shorter except in Ranodon (about 100-
120% of head-body length) and in
Onychodactylus (about 100-115%). The
tail lengths of Hynobius species are
significantly shorter than the head-body
length (60-80%); only in the adults of H.
nigrescens does the tail occasionally equal
head-body in length. Apparently in all
hynobiids, tail length relative to head-body
increases with overall size, so the numbers
given here are all taken, for comparative
purposes, from large adults.
Vomer and Vomerine Teeth. The paired
vomer bones (or prevomers for those who
deny homology to the vomer of mammals)
of the palate bear teeth near their posterior
edges. The relationship between the
vomers and the parasphenoids lying
posterior to them varies among hynobiid
genera (Table 1). In S. retardatus, the
posterior edge of the vomer is sutured to
the parasphenoid and overlaps very little, if
at all in some specimens, onto the palatal
surface of the parasphenoid (Inukai, 1932;
Sato, 1943). The two series of vomerine
teeth extend broadly between the internal
nares in two slight arcs which nearly meet
at the midline; the overall length of this
patch of teeth along the midline is about
30% of the width of the series.
The general pattern of these teeth is like
those in the genera Onychodactylus and
Ranodon, and quite unlike that in Hynobius
where the vomers (and the vomerine teeth
on their posterior surface) extend onto the
parasphenoids to a degree varying from
species to species. In some Hynobius this
overlap is small (e.g., H. leechii and
lichenatus) but in most it extends onto the
palatal surface for from one-third to as
much as one-half the length of the
parasphenoids (e.g., H. formosanus and
sonani) (Sato, 1943). Since the vomerine
teeth are located on this edge of the vomer,
in these Hynobius the vomerine series has a
pattern wholly unlike that in retardatus,
beginning at the nares and extending far
posteriorly on the palate in the shape of a
lyre (see Table 1). In H. formosanus, for
example, the length of the vomerine teeth
along the midline of the palate is fully twice
the total width of the two series (versus
30% in 5. retardatus).
Chromosomes. Makino (1932) was the
first to report that S. retardatus has a
diploid chromosome number of 40, as
confirmed by others (Azumi and Sasaki,
1971; Morescalchi, 1975). No other
hynobiid is known to have fewer than 56.
In Japanese species of Hynobius, the so-
called pond-type species are 2n=5 6
(retardatus is a pond breeder) and the
mountain brook types are 2/i=58 (except H.
okiensis where 2n=56); H. kimurai is
ordinarily 2n=56, except in one population
(2n=60) which may represent a separate
species (Morescalchi, 1975; Morescalchi et
al., 1979; Ikebe et al., 1989). The Korean
H. leechii is 2n=56 (Makino, 1934), but
the chromosome number is not known for
any of the Chinese species of Hynobius.
Recent studies by Japanese and Italian
workers show that the karyology of S.
retardatus is even more different from that
of Hynobius species than the low number
of chromosomes would suggest. The
combined lengths of the chromosomes in
the genomes of Hynobius species and in
retardatus are nearly equal at the same
degree of condensation, and the amount of
nuclear DNA is also approximately equal
(Morescalchi, 1975). Despite these
similarities, there are important differences
that set retardatus apart from species of
Hynobius. Kuro-o et al. (1987, as
modified in 1989) were able to compare
chromosome pairs in four Hynobius (3
Japanese and 1 Korean species) and
retardatus, using the R-banding technique
(RBG method), allowing them to identify
18 of 28 pairs in Hynobius and 16 of 20 in
retardatus. Based on this analysis,
chromosome pairs 2 and 8 of retardatus are
not at all represented in the genomes of
these Hynobius species, whereas pairs 2,
12, 20, and 22, found in all four
Hynobius, were lacking altogether in that
of retardatus; other chromosome pairs were
completely (11 pairs) or partially (3 pairs)
homeologous. To summarize, among these
four Hynobius species homeologies
totalled about 90%, but this value fell to
65% when retardatus was included. DNA
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 43
analysis was also performed by these
authors, using highly-repetitive DNAs as
probes on Southern blot hybridization,
which showed that retardatus was
distinctively different from the five
Hynobius species tested (4 Japanese and 1
Korean).
Breeding Biology. The reproductive
biology of 5. retardatus has been studied in
detail (Sasaki, 1924; Makino, 1933; Sato,
1989 and references cited therein). The
larval period is normally less than a year,
but at high elevations can take more than
one year. Neotenous individuals are well
known (Sasaki, 1924). Adults breed in
ponds and are terrestrial during non-
reproductive periods. However, unlike
species of Hynobius which remain on land
while not breeding, retardatus often visits
the water during non-breeding periods
(Sasaki, 1924).
Distribution. Satobius retardatus is found
only in Hokkaido, the northernmost of the
main Japanese islands. No Hynobius are
known from Hokkaido and, among
hynobiids, only Salamandrella keyserlingii
is found there.
Relationships. Historically, 5. retardatus
has been said to be most closely related to
H. nigrescens of neighboring Honshu
Island, Japan (Sato, 1943). Indeed, the
two species are superficially similar in that,
as adults, both are blackish in color with
little pattern and both possess relatively
long tails. However, on closer
examination, these two species are
fundamentally different. H. nigrescens is a
large-headed and short-necked species, as
are all Hynobius, when compared with S.
retardatus. The skull of nigrescens, in
particular the vomer-parasphenoid
relationship and the pattern of vomerine
teeth, are typical of Hynobius and unlike
the situation in Satobius. Furthermore, the
number of chromosomes and details of
chromosome structure, based on both C-
banding and R-banding methods, are
distinctly different. In short, we believe
that the similarities between nigrescens and
retardatus are due to convergence and do
not reflect close phylogenetic relationship.
Several of the diagnostic characteristics
of S. retardatus are similar to those of
members of the R a no don group of
hynobiids, which includes Batrachuperus,
Liua, Onychodactylus, and Ranodon (Zhao
and Hu, 1984). The suturing of the vomer
and parasphenoid, the pattern of vomerine
teeth, and the relative lengths of limbs and
tail in retardatus are similar to the condition
in one or more members of the Ranodon
group, but in most other respects Satobius
is clearly a member of the Hynobius group
of genera: Hynobius, Pachypalaminus
(synonymized with Hynobius by Nishio et
al., 1987) and Salamandrella (for
discussion of these two groups of genera,
see Zhao and Hu, 1984). Within this
group, the closest living relative of
retardatus may be H. leechii of Korea and
northeastern China, according to their
chromosome structure; indeed, as Ikebe et
al. (1989) point out, based on C-banding
patterns, retardatus is more similar to the
northernmost populations of leechii rather
than those in the southern part of the
Korean peninsula.
We suggest that the ancestral stock
leading to S. retardatus was derived from a
Hynobius-likc ancestor and arrived in
Japan from the mainland very early, before
the formation of the Tsugaru Strait which
later isolated Hokkaido from the southern
Japanese islands. Satobius differentiated in
Japan but was later excluded from the more
southern Japanese islands by a later
invasion of hynobiids from the mainland.
Thus isolated by the Tsugaru barrier,
Satobius further differentiated, yet retained
some of its primitive characters, including a
few today found only in the Ranodon
group.
The long isolation from Hynobius has
led also to the chromosomal differentiation
described earlier (although retaining some
similarities to H. leechii on the mainland).
The great reduction in chromosome number
in retardatus may be due in part to fusions,
since the total composite lengths and DNA
content are approximately the same as for
the Hynobius genome (Kuro-o et al.,
1989). However, in view of the many
differences based on the C-banding and R-
Vol. 3, p. 44
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
banding studies mentioned above, the
karyotype of retardatus cannot be explained
by a simple mechanism of fusions alone.
Etymology. We take great pleasure in
naming this new genus for Ikio Sato (1902-
1945), who first recognized its
distinctiveness from Hynobius. The name
Satobius is derived in part from the stem of
Hynobius (hynis [or hynnis], Greek for
plowshare, the cutting part of a plow, and
bios, life).
Acknowledgments
Our research has been supported by the
USA National Academy of Sciences
(Committee on Scholarly Exchange with
the People's Republic of China). We thank
Barry Clarke (British Museum [Nat. Hist.])
and Robert C. Drewes and Jens V. Vindum
(California Academy of Sciences) for the
loan of specimens. We thank Satoshi
Amagai (Cornell University) for some
translations of articles in Japanese.
Literature Cited
ADLER, K. (ed.) 1989. Contributions to the
History of Herpetology. Society for the Study
of Amphibians and Reptiles, Contributions to
Herpetology 5:1-202.
AZUMI, J. AND M. SASAKI. 1971. Karyotypes of
Hynobius retardatus Dunn and Hynobius
nigrescens Stejneger. Chromosome Information
Service 12:31-32.
BORING, A. M. AND T.-K. CHANG. 1933. The
distribution of the Amphibia of Chekiang
province. Peking Natural History Bulletin
8:63-74.
CAI, C.-M. 1985. [A survey of tailed amphibians
of Zhejiang, with description of a new species
of Hynobius]. Acta Herpetologica Sinica
4:109-114. (In Chinese).
CAI, M.-Z., J. ZHANG, AND D.-J. LIN. 1985.
[Preliminary observation on the embryonic
development of Hynobius chinensis Guenther].
Acta Herpetologica Sinica 4:177-180. (In
Chinese).
CHANG, T.-K. 1933. Two new amphibian records
from Chekiang. Peking Natural History
Bulletin 8:75-80.
DUNN, E. R. 1923a. New species of Hynobius
from Japan. Proceedings of the California
Academy of Sciences, ser. 4, 12:27-29.
DUNN, E. R. 1923b. The salamanders of the
family Hynobiidae. Proceedings of the
American Academy of Arts and Sciences
58:445-523.
GONTHER, A. 1889. Third contribution to our
knowledge of reptiles and fishes from the Upper
Yangtsze-Kiang. Annals and Magazine of
Natural History, ser. 6, 4:218-229.
IKEBE, C, M. KURO-O, T. OHHASHI, H.
YAMADA, K.-I. AOKI, AND S.-I. KOHNO.
1989. Evolution of chromosome 10 in ten
pond-type Hynobius from Korea and Japan, with
comments on phylogenetic relationships. Pp.
85-90. In M. Matsui et al. (eds.), Current
Herpetology in East Asia. Herpetological
Society of Japan, Kyoto.
INUKAI, T. 1932. Urodelenarten aus Nordjapan
mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung der
Morphologie des Schadels. Journal of the
Faculty of Science, Hokkaido Imperial
University ser. 6, 1:191-217.
KURO-O, M., C. IKEBE, AND S. KOHNO. 1987.
Cytogenetic studies of Hynobiidae (Urodela).
VI. R-banding patterns in five pond-type
Hynobius from Korea and Japan. Cytogenetics
and Cell Genetics 44:69-75.
KURO-O, M., C. IKEBE, R. KATAKURA, Y.
IZUMISAWA, AND S.-I. KOHNO. 1989.
Analyses of phylogenetic relationships in the
genus Hynobius by means of chromosome
banding and Southern blot hybridization. Pp.
91-94. In M. Matsui et al. (eds.), Current
Herpetology in East Asia. Herpetological
Society of Japan, Kyoto.
MAKINO, S. 1932. The chromosome number in
some salamanders from northern Japan. Journal
of the Faculty of Science, Hokkaido Imperial
University ser. 6 (Zool.) 2:97-108.
MAKINO, S. 1933. [Several ecological
observations on Hynobius retardatus Dunn].
Shokubutsu oyobi Dobutsu (Botany and
Zoology), Tokyo 1:1 136-1 142. (In Japanese).
MAKINO, S. 1934. The chromosomes of
Hynobius leechii and H. nebulosus.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 45
Transactions of the Sapporo Natural History
Society 13:351-354.
MIS AW A, Y. 1989. The method of counting
costal grooves. Pp. 129-134. In M. Matsui et
al. (eds.), Current Herpetology in East Asia.
Herpetogical Society of Japan, Kyoto.
MORESCALCHI, A. 1975. Chromosome
evolution in the caudate Amphibia. Pp. 339-
387. In T. Dobzhansky et al. (eds.),
Evolutionary Biology, vol. 8. Plenum Press,
New York.
MORESCALCHI, A., G. ODIERNA, AND E. OLMO.
1979. Karyology of the primitive salamanders,
family Hynobiidae. Experientia 35:1434-1436.
NISHIO, K., M. MATSUI, AND M. TASUMI.
1987. The lacrimal bone in salamanders of the
genera Hynobius and Pachypalaminus: a
reexamination of its taxonomic significance.
Monitore Zoologico Italiano, new ser. 21:307-
315.
POPE, C. H. 1931. Notes on amphibians from
Fukien, Hainan, and other parts of China.
Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural
History 61:397-611.
POPE, C. H. AND A. M. BORING. 1940. A
survey of Chinese Amphibia. Peking Natural
History Bulletin 15:13-86.
PRATT, A. E. 1892. To the Snows of Tibet
Through China. Longmans, Green, and Co.,
London. 268 pp.
SASAKI, M. 1924. On a Japanese salamander, in
Lake Kuttarush, which propagates like the
axolotl. Journal of the College of Agriculture,
Hokkaido Imperial University 15:1-36
("Hynobius lichenatus" = Satobius retardatus).
SATO, I. 1943. [A Monograph of the Tailed
Batrachians of Japan]. Nippon Shuppan-sha,
Osaka, 520, 7 pages, 31 color plates. (In
Japanese).
SATO, T. 1989. Breeding environment and
spawning of a salamander, Hynobius retardatus,
at the foot of Hidaka Mountains, Hokkaido,
Japan. Pp. 292-304. In M. Matsui et al. (eds.),
Current Herpetology in East Asia.
Herpetological Society of Japan, Kyoto.
ZHAO, E.-M. AND Q.-X. HU. 1983. [Taxonomy
and evolution of Hynobiidae in western China,
with description of a new genus.] Acta Herpetol.
Sinica 2(2):29-35 (In Chinese). (English
translation published in Zhao et al., 1988,
Studies on Chinese Salamanders. Society for
the Study of Amphibians and Reptiles,
Contributions to Herpetology 4: ix, 1-67).
ZHAO, E.-M. AND Q.-X. HU. 1984. [Studies on
Chinese Tailed Amphibians.] Sichuan Sci.
Tech. Publ. House, Chengdu, (3), 68 pages (In
Chinese). (English translation published in
Zhao et al., 1988, Studies on Chinese
Salamanders. Society for the Study of
Amphibians and Reptiles, Contributions to
Herpetology 4: ix, 1-67).
ZHAO, E.-M. AND K. ADLER. 1989. [Hynobius
chinensis, a re-description on its 100th
anniversary]. Sichuan Journal of Zoology
8(2): 18-20, 1 plate. (In Chinese).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.3, pp. 46-51
Relationships Between Serum T4, T3, Cortisol and the Metabolism of
Chemical Energy Sources in the Cobra During Pre-hibernation, Hibernation
and Post-hibernation
RUIMIN WU1 AND JlE HUANG1
^Department of Biology, Fujian Medical College, Fujian, China
Abstract. -This study analyzed the variation of the serum thyroxine (T4), triiodothyronine (T3), and
Cortisol in the cobra (Naja naja Linnaeus) in pre-hibernation, hibernation, and post-hibernation. The
variations were compared with the changes of indexes of cobra metabolism in those three periods, such as
oxygen consumption, serum glucose, serum triglyceride, glycogen content of liver, and triglyceride content
of fat bodies. From pre-hibernation to hibernation, the change of metabolic indexes of the cobra indicated
that the metabolic rate tends to decline because of the very low levels of the three serum hormones in pre-
hibernation and falling temperature. Low temperature during hibernation limited the activities of the three
serum hormones which were rising at higher levels during hibernation. From hibernation to post
hibernation, the rising temperature allowed the three serum hormones to increase markedly, stimulating
metabolism gradually. Therefore the metabolic rate of the cobra during post-hibernation tended to rise
again. The metabolic indexes of the cobra in post-hibernation showed a significant increase in metabolic
rate, which had close relation with the high levels of the three serum hormones. The indexes of
metabolism of the cobra indicate that it is hepatic glycogen and not fat that hibernating cobras use as their
main energy source.
Key Words: Reptilia, Serpentes, Elapidae, Naja naja, cobra, thyroxine, triiodothyronine, Cortisol,
metabolism, energy metabolites, chemical energy sources.
Introduction
Hibernation is an adaptive strategy of
ectotherms for keeping out of the cold
during winter. The metabolic rate of the
hibernating reptiles is apparently different
from that of active ones, as a result of
physiological adaptation. The endocrine
system and its close relation to metabolism
may play an important role in physiological
adaptation. Maher (1965) pointed out that
the maximum metabolic response in lizards
to thyroxine occurred at 3°C; Wilhoft
(1966) found that injections of thyroxine in
lizards increased their metabolism.
Musucchia (1984) suggested that the
injection of Cortisol into hamsters during
hibernation or hypothermia could achieve
the same result as the injection of glucose,
which might prolong the survival of
hamsters under the same conditions. We
consider that the metabolism of energy
metabolites in hibernating snakes must have
a close relation to the control of serum
thyroxine (T4), triiodothyronine (T3), and
Cortisol. This study may provide a way to
find the mechanism of snake hibernation
and guidance for maintaining snakes.
Methods
This study was carried out from
September 1987 to May 1988. Cobras
Naja naja (Linnaeus) used as experimental
animals were captured at Changlou, Fujian
Province, China. We studied serum T4, T3,
and Cortisol, and related indexes of
metabolism in cobras during pre-
hibernation, hibernation, and post-
hibernation.
Cobra groups: 12 adult cobras (6 males, 6
females) were captured in May 1987,
weighing 176-273 g. These cobras had
been fed in our college snake garden for 4
months before the experiment. On
September 9, 1987, 6 cobras were taken
out of the snake garden and tested as a pre-
hibernation group (Pre G). On October 2,
1987, the remaining 6 cobras were
transferred from the snake garden into a
dark cement pool with a perforated metal
window above. The temperature in the
pool was similar to the atmosphere. On
1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 47
February 10, 1988, 3 cobras were taken
out from the pool and tested as a
hibernation group (H G), and on May 7,
the last three cobras were tested as a post-
hibernation group (Post G).
Determination of oxygen consumption:
The oxygen consumption of each group
was determined using the method of Dong
et al. (1986) corrected by the authors.
Heart beats and respiratory state: Heart rate
and respiratory state of each group were
measured by routine methods.
Analysis of three hormones: Blood was
drawn from the posterior vena cava.
Serum T4, T3, and Cortisol of each group
were analyzed by radioimmunoassay by
means of kits produced by the Institute of
Shanghai Biologicals. Each sample was
analyzed twice.
Analysis of serum energy metabolites:
Serum glucose and serum triglycerides of
each group of snakes were analyzed by
clinical chemistry methods, and each
sample was analyzed twice.
Analysis of hepatic glycogen: Fresh snake
liver of each group was weighed and cut
into pieces. After having been in boiling
water for 5 minutes, the liver pieces were
homogenized. The homogenate was in
boiling water for another twenty minutes
and filtered immediately. The filtered
homogenate was mixed with 95% alcohol -
A. R. (mean analysis reagent) to twice the
volume and kept at room temperature for
ten minutes before it was centrifuged for
twenty minutes at 3000 rpm. The
supernate was drawn out, the sediment
(glycogen) soluble in hot water was
estimated by the following calculation:
Hepatic glycogen (g/Kg(BW)) = total glycogen
content in liver/body weight (BW)
Analysis of fat body triglycerides: Fresh
snake fat bodies of each group was
weighed and a small weighed part was
homogenized in a fixed volume of n-
heptane (C7H16). The fat tissue was
extracted in this way three times.
Triglycerides of fat bodies extracted in n-
heptane were analyzed by clinical chemical
methods.
Triglycerides of fat body(g/Kg(BW)) = triglyceride
content in fat body/body weight (BW)
Results
1. Variations of the three serum hormones
during Pre G, HG and Post G
The levels of serum T4, T3, and Cortisol
of Pre G were the lowest in the three cobra
groups. The level of serum Cortisol of HG
was markedly lower than that of post G.
The levels of T4 and T3 of HG were not
distincdy different from those of Post G
(Table 1).
2. Variations of the oxygen consumption
and energy metabolites during Pre G, HG
and Post G
The oxygen consumption of the HG
group was significantly the lowest of the
three cobra groups. The oxygen
consumption of Pre G was not significantly
different from that of Post G.
The contents of serum glucose of both
TABLE 1. Experimental results of the three
serum hormones and t tests.
* Too small to measure. **Significant at 0.05.
Vol. 3, p. 48
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 2. Experimental results of oxygen consumption by energy substances, and t tests.
BW = Body Weight. **P < 0.05
Pre G and Post G were apparently higher
than that of HG. But the content of serum
glucose of Pre G was not significantly
different from that of Post G.
The hepatic glycogen content of the
cobras appeared to decline during
hibernation. The hepatic glycogen content
of HG was markedly less than that of Pre
G, and the hepatic glycogen of Post G was
less than that of HG.
Similar to the variation of serum
glucose, the content of serum triglycerides
of Pre G was higher than that of HG, but
there were not significant differences
between the serum triglycerides of post G
and that of HG, and between that of Pre G
and that of Post G. The triglyceride
contents of fat bodies in the three cobra
groups did not have any statistical
differences from one another (Table 2).
Discussion
1. Variations of the oxygen consumption
and energy metabolites in the cobras during
the three periods
The contents of serum glucose and
triglycerides of Pre G were relatively high
due to the cobras active intake before
entering hibernation, which was
advantageous for the storage of energy
metabolites for overwintering. The oxygen
consumption was large during this period,
but the contents of glucose and triglycerides
of HG were apparently at low level.
Oxygen consumption decreased markedly
in this period. The hepatic glycogen
content during hibernation became 99%
less than during pre-hibernation. The
triglyceride content of fat bodies of the HG
group seemed to rise a little, perhaps due to
some triglyceride synthesis at the beginning
of hibernation.
These results indicate that the metabolic
rate of cobras during hibernation remains at
a low level and oxygen consumption,
serum glucose, and serum triglyceride
content fell markedly, and that hepatic
glycogen is used as the main energy source
instead of fat body triglycerides. In post-
hibernation, the serum glucose content rose
significantly and the content of hepatic
glycogen decreased by 92 percent less than
that of HG, showing that cobras had used
hepatic glycogen to the greatest degree for
evoking their activities. This variation
provided a good situation for cobras to
come out from hibernation, and at the same
time, oxygen consumption increased
gready. The rising serum triglycerides of
post G also meant that the cobras' fatty
metabolism began to become active.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 49
Compared with that of pre G, the
oxygen consumption of post G was
relatively large, but the serum glucose and
serum triglyceride content of post G were
relatively low. The reasons may be: 1) that
the pre G cobras were not fasting so that
their contents of serum glucose and
triglycerides were relatively high, 2) that
the post G cobras had so little hepatic
glycogen as to be unable to raise their
serum glucose and triglyceride contents as
high as those of the Pre G group, and 3)
that the rising temperature and the high
serum hormone level after hibernation
accelerated the organs and tissues to take in
glucose and triglycerides from the blood.
Among the three reasons the latter was the
most important because of the apparent rise
in oxygen consumption. This amount
indicated that the metabolism in the organs
and tissues had been enhanced markedly.
2. Variation of the three serum hormones
Serum T3 of HG was 56.6% higher than
that of Pre G, and serum T3 of Post G
51.7% higher than that of HG. Similar to
serum T3, serum T4 of Pre G was too low
to be tested, but T3 of HG rose
significantly, and T3 of Post G continued to
rise 43.2% more than that of HG. As a
result, serum T3 and T4 were increasing
steadily during hibernation. This partem of
serum T4 was similar to the results reported
by Nauleau, et al. (1987).
A comparison between the variations of
serum T3 and serum T4 can provide some
important information about the secretive
state of the thyroid gland. Before
hibernation, serum T4 was very low, and
serum T3 was higher, being in a dominant
position, but in hibernation, serum T4 was
twice as great as serum T3, though both of
them had increased. These variations were
caused by the increased activity of the
thyroid gland during hibernation. Turner
and Bagnara (1976) suggested that the
activity of the thyroid gland of ectotherms
was low both in summer and during pre-
hibernation. It was enhanced during
hibernation, reaching a peak during post-
hibernation. The thyroid gland mainly
secretes T4, which is the precursor of T3.
The secreted T4 is converted into T3 in the
blood or in the tissues and organs. The
function of stimulating metabolism by T3 is
at least three times stronger than that by T4.
The activity of the cobra thyroid gland was
at a low level in pre-hibernation. The
synthesized and secreted T4 was very low
and a portion of T4 was converted into T3
thus the concentration of serum T4 was at a
low level and the level of T3 was relatively
high. After the cobra entered hibernation,
the secretive function of the thyroid gland
began to become active and produce more
and more T4, therefore serum T4 dominated
at a higher level though both T4 and T3
increased in the blood. The variation of
serum T4 and T3 in post G was the same as
in HG. The very high levels of serum T4
and T3 in post G were of great advantage to
the cobra enhancing its metabolic rate for
arising from hibernation. Besides these,
the results in Table 1 and Table 2 also
indicate that the levels of serum T4, and T3,
of HG were higher than that of Pre G, but
the amount of oxygen consumption of HG
was less than that of Pre G. This seemed
to be self-contradictory because both T4,
and T3, were able to stimulate metabolism.
These phenomena resulted in the falling
temperature, inhibiting the function of
hormones. Wilhoft (1966) pointed out that
the function of T4 stimulating metabolism
appeared to be inactive in many reptiles at
low body temperature, and to be active only
at higher temperature. Stimulation of
metabolism was carried out in such a way
that T4 and T3 were capable of inducing the
synthesis of aerobic metabolic enzymes.
The low levels of serum T4 and T3 in pre-
hibernation indicated that the metabolic rate
of cobras in this period tends to fall.
The metabolic enzymes which had been
synthesized were still in an active state
because of the higher temperature, thus the
pre G cobras had a high oxygen
consumption. The metabolic rate of HG,
though serum T4 and T3 levels had risen,
was at a low level due to the low
temperature during hibernation which
inhibited the function of T3 (T4) and the
activity of metabolic enzymes synthesized
before. The cobras of HG had a small
oxygen consumption. The very high levels
Vol. 3, p. 50
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
of serum T4 and T3 gradually performed the
function of stimulating metabolism in the
phase at the end of hibernation as the
temperature was rising.
Serum Cortisol was increasing
continuously during hibernation. Serum
Cortisol of HG was 2.8 times higher than
that of pre G, and that of post G which
continued to rise by 3.6 times more than
that of HG. Musacchia (1984) reported
that the survival of animals during
hibernation or hypothermia had a close
relation to the level of serum Cortisol in
their bodies. An injection of Cortisol into
hamsters during hibernation or hypothermia
could yield the same result as an injection
of glucose, and might increase the survival
of hamsters under the same conditions. He
also reported that glucocorticosteroids
played an important role in animals arising
from hibernation or hypothermia. Some
clues perhaps could be found for reptiles
from the experimental results on hamsters,
although they were very different in other
respects.
The results in Table 2 indicated that the
hepatic glycogen content of HG was very
low. It was difficult for cobras to continue
hibernating while only using so little an
amount of hepatic glycogen as a energy
source. They must receive energy
metabolites in other ways.
Gluconeogenesis may be an important
process in which Cortisol has a close
relation. The surprarenal cortex of cobras
during hibernation became active gradually
and the level of serum Cortisol became
higher and higher, which was related to
accelerating gluconeogenesis and to the
cobra's arising from hibernation. The
variation of Cortisol showed that fat
metabolism became active after cobras were
aroused out of hibernation.
3. Relationship between the three serum
hormones and energy metabolites
In pre-hibernation, the function of T4 and
T3 in inducing synthesis of aerobic
metabolic enzymes was weak because of
the low levels of serum T4 and T3. The
metabolism of cobras in this period was
under the control of the enzymes which had
been synthesized before. The metabolic
rate of cobras tended to decrease from pre-
hibernation to hibernation as the
temperature was falling and as the amount
of enzyme reduced (synthesizing less and
degrading). During hibernation, when the
temperature was low, cobras had a low
metabolism under the control of the low-
temperature isozymes, though the levels of
serum hormones were at relatively higher.
The low serum glucose and triglyceride
contents implied that the decreased
metabolism of cobras in hibernation, and
the reduction of glycogen in the liver
indicated the metabolic rate of cobras at a
certain level. In post-hibernation, high
temperature provided a favorable factor for
hormones to perform their functions, and
T3 (T4) induced synthesis of enzymes and
Cortisol accelerated the gluconeogenesis and
fat catabolism. Serum glucose was
increasing markedly though the hepatic
glycogen was low, and quite a lot of
glucose was produced from
gluconeogenesis. Serum T4 and T3 play an
important role in accelerating somatic cells
to take in energy metabolites and in raising
metabolism.
In short, during hibernation the cobra
nearly used up all the hepatic glycogen but
consumed little fat body triglyceride. Body
weight tended to be lost significantly during
the period after the snake was aroused out
of hibernation. Perhaps fat bodies were
used up because there was little hepatic
glycogen. The high level of Cortisol
indicated the tendency for fat catabolism.
4. One putative pattern
From the above results, we consider that
perhaps the cobra has formed a seasonal
regulation of endocrine and that hibernation
is controlled by this mechanism. When the
season for hibernation comes, the contents
of serum T4, T3, and Cortisol decrease so
that the metabolic system of all organs and
tissues in cobras is controlled effectively.
The metabolic rate of cobras tends to go
down. With temperature falling and the
three serum hormones reducing, the
remaining metabolic enzymes in cobras
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 51
become inactive gradually (content less and
activity low) and cobras go into hibernation
keeping their metabolic rate at a fairly low
level under the control of the low
temperature isozymes, and after physical
regulation. This suggests that the external
factor for cobra hibernation is the fall of
temperature, while the internal factor is the
drop of the three serum hormone levels. In
hibernation, the contents of serum T4, T3,
and Cortisol increases gradually, but the
levels of the three serum hormones are not
high enough to accelerate metabolism of the
organs and tissues, and the low temperature
inhibits the activities of the three serum
hormones. When the levels of serum T4,
T3, and Cortisol are high enough, the
metabolism of the organs and tissues in
cobras tends to go up. With the
temperature rising, the three serum
hormones induce the synthesis of aerobic
metabolic enzymes in the organs and
tissues and accelerate the metabolism of
energy metabolites. The metabolic rate
rises and the cobra recovers from
hibernation. This suggests that the external
factor for the cobra to come out of
hibernation is the rise of temperature, while
the internal factor is the rise of the three
serum hormone levels.
Literature Cited
DONG, Y. J. ZHAO, J. YANG, Y. CUI, G. LI, AND
B. CHEN. 1986. Studies on physiological
ecology of Rana spinosa during hybernation
and activation. Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1986,
5(4):24 1-245.
MAHER, M. T. 1965. The role of the thyroid
gland in the oxygen consumption of lizards.
General Comparative Endocrinology 5(3):320-
325.
MUSACCIA, X. J. 1984. Comparative
physiological and biochemical aspects of
hypothermia as a model for hibernation.
Cryobiology 21(6):583-592.
NAULLEAU, G., F. FLEURY, AND J. BOISSIN.
1987. Annual cycles in plasma testosterone and
thyroxine in male Aspic Vipera aspis L.
(Reptilia, Viperidae), in relation to the sexual
cycle and hibernation. General Comparative
Endocrinology 65(2):254-263.
TURNER, G. AND T. J. BAGNARA. 1976. General
endocrinology, sixth ed. W.R. Co.
Philadelphia.
WILHOFT, D. C. 1966. The metabolic response to
thyroxine of lizards maintained in a thermal
gradient. General Comparative Endocrinology
7(3):445-451.
5. Conclusion
Serum T4, T3, and Cortisol at low levels
were involved in the regulation of
depressing the metabolism of cobras before
hibernation. The low temperature during
hibernation inhibited activity of the three
serum hormones, and the metabolism was
at a low level. With the rising temperature,
the levels of serum T4, T3, and Cortisol at
very high levels accelerated the metabolic
rate of cobras which resulted in arousal
from hibernation. Cobras in hibernation
used hepatic glycogen as their main energy
source instead of fat body triglycerides.
I April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 52-53
Intergradation Between Melanochelys trijuga trijuga and M. t. coronata
(Testudines: Emydidae: Batagurinae)
INDRANEIL DAS1 AND PETER C. H. PRITCHARD2
1 Animal Ecology Research Group, Department of Zoology, Oxford University, Oxford 0X1 3PS, England
^Florida Audubon Society, 1101 Audubon Way, Maitland, Florida 32751, USA
Key words: Reptilia, Testudines, Emydidae, Melanochelys, India, distribution, intergrade.
The Indian Black Turtle or pe amai,
Melanochelys trijuga, is one of the most
abundant chelonians in the Indian
subcontinent, with a distribution extending
from Sri Lanka (Deraniyagala 1939),
through India and Burma, to western
Thailand (Wirot 1979), although apparently
excluding Bangladesh (Das, 1989).
Nevertheless, details of the distribution of
the seven described subspecies remain
obscure. The range maps provided by
Smith (1931), Das (1985), and Tikader and
Sharma (1985) indicate rather clearly
allopatric distributions for the Indian
subspecies, but the overall range of the
species is based on extremely few and
widely-separated locality points (except for
Sri Lanka and Kerala), as is evident in the
map provided by Iverson (1986).
Deraniyagala (1939) recognized two
subspecies in Sri Lanka, but the geographic
separation, if any, between these two forms
was not made clear.
Of the various subspecies, the most
distinctive is probably Melanochelys trijuga
coronata, whose distribution is restricted to
the state of Kerala in southwestern India
(the distribution map provided by Tikader
and Sharma (1985) involves a transposition
of the range of coronata and trijuga ). M.
t. coronata has a striking head pattern, with
a broad, black diamond-shaped marking on
the crown of the head, contrasting with the
white to yellow temporal region. The head
pattern of the other subspecies consists at
most of small, yellow to pink spots and
reticulations that may disappear with age.
The shell as a whole is usually unrelieved
black, in contrast to other subspecies in
which at least a lighter plastral rim is
evident (although Deraniyagala (1939)
reported completely black specimens of M.
t . trijuga from Kalpitiya, Sri Lanka and
we have seen increased pigmentation with
age in the north Indian subspecies,
indopeninsularis, in which adult animals
may lose the lighter plastral rim). The
distribution of M. t. coronata is generally
indicated as widely separated from that of
M. t. trijuga by the Western Ghats, but the
southward penetration of the forma typica
into the hiatus between these two
subspecies is not represented on existing
range maps, and the subspecific
relationship between these two forms has
been assumed rather than demonstrated.
We here report upon four specimens that
bridge the geographic map between M. t.
trijuga and M. t. coronata, and three that
show characters intergradient between
them.
An adult male (CL 23.9 cm; CW
16.4 cm) was collected by the two authors
from a dry stream bed in Chichli, Indira
Ghandi (formerly Annamalai) Wildlife
Sanctuary, Coimbatore District, Tamil
Nadu, on March 27, 1989 (Fig. 1). The
right anterior margin of the shell showed
signs of an old injury, with several
peripheral bones lost. The head pattern of
the specimen included the diamond- shaped
marking typical of Melanochelys trijuga
coronata. The yellow head reticulations
and the yellow plastral margin is suggestive
of M. t. trijuga, and the size of the
specimen is greater than that of any
recorded specimen of M. t. coronata
(maximum 17.5 cm (Smith 1931) or
18 cm (Tikader and Sharma 1985) of
20.8 cm (Das 1985)). The specimen was
retained alive and housed at the Madras
Crocodile Bank.
1990 bv Asiatic ileroetoloeical Research
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 53
FIG. 1. Intergrade between Melanochelys trijuga
coronata and M. t. trijuga.
A second specimen — a fragmentary
shell only — was also found in the Indira
Ghandi Wildlife Sanctuary, in a tribal
settlement. The nuchal area and anterior
peripherals are missing. Shell width is
13.7 cm, again indicating a specimen larger
than is typical of Melanochelys trijuga
coronata. Ankylosis of the shell, as
illustrated for Sri Lanka specimens by
Deraniyagala (1939), is essentially
complete, except for faint indications of the
peripheral sutures. The specimen is
registered as PCHP 2803 in the private
collection of the second author.
In addition to these, two intergradient
specimens were found in the collection of
the Southern Regional Station of the
Zoological Survey of India (Madras), both
collected by M. Vasant and party. An
8.1 cm juvenile (Lot no. 10) was collected
at Kombiar Charagam, Kalakkadu Wildlife
Sanctuary, Turunelveli District, Tamil
Nadu (altitude 210 m), on October 13,
1987. A 20.6 cm adult male (Lot no. 6)
was collected at Nambiar, Nambi Kovil
Road, also within Kalakkadu Wildlife
Sanctuary (altitude 140 m), on January 11,
1987.
Melanochelys trijuga is basically a pond
turtle, and the Western Ghats appear to
separate the essentially lowland ranges of
M. t. coronata and M. t. trijuga
Nevertheless, the new localities all fall
within upland areas actually in the Western
Ghats. It appears that the hills may form a
sufficient barrier to allow the evolution of
different subspecies east and west of the
Ghats, but the ability of M. trijuga to exist
far from water suggests that individuals
wandering into these hills may provide the
stock for an intergradient population. It
would be worthwhile to search for a
lowland intergradient population in the
coastal area at the northern extreme of the
distribution of M. t. coronata.
Other cases exist of congeneric
batagurine species of a similar ecological
role differing primarily in head pattern, as
is the case with some of the species of
Rhinoclemmys in the Neotropics. One is
tempted to interpret the different markings
as a means of avoiding cross-matings in
situations of sympatry. But, the overall
allopatry of the species of Rhinoclemmys
in northern South America, for example,
suggests that this interpretation may be an
incomplete one, as does the discovery of
intergradation between adjacent populations
of Melanochelys that differ primarily in
cephalic pigmentation.
Literature Cited
DAS, I. 1985. Indian turtles. A field guide.
World Wildlife Fund India, Eastern Region,
Calcutta.
DAS, I. 1989. Report on a survey of freshwater
turtles and land tortoises in Bangladesh. Report
to Fauna and Flora Preservation Society, July
1989. Mimeo9pp.
DERANIYAGALA, P. E. P. 1939. The tetrapod
reptiles of Ceylon. Colombo Museum,
Colombo. 412 pp.
IVERSON, J. B. 1986. A checklist with
distribution maps of the turtles of the world.
Paust Printing, Richmond, Indiana. 283 pp.
SMITH, M. A. 1931. The fauna of British India,
including Ceylon and Burma. Reptilia and
Amphibia, Vol. 1. Loricata, Testudines.
Taylor and Francis, London. 185 pp.
TIKADER, B. K. AND R. C. SHARMA. 1985.
Handbook: Indian Testudines. Zoological
Survey of India, Calcutta.
WIROT, N. 1979. The turtles of Thailand.
Mitbhadung Press, Bankok.
[April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 54l9]
Thermal Sensitivity of Sprinting and Clinging Performance in the Tokay
Gecko (Gekko gecko)
JONATHAN B. LOSOS1
1 Museum of Vertebrate Zoology and Department of Integrative Biology,
University of California, Berkeley, CA 94720 USA
Abstract. -The thermal sensitivity of sprinting and clinging ability was measured in tokay geckos
(Gekko gecko). Sprinting performance was maximal at high (35-4 1°C) temperatures, as is the case for
other nocturnal lizards, but the optimal temperature for clinging was considerably lower (approximately
17°C). These different optima could be adaptive if maximal sprinting and clinging capabilities are needed at
different temperatures. Alternatively, they could result from constraints on adaptive evolution.
Key Words: Reptilia, Sauria, Gekkonidae, Gecko gecko, thermal sensitivity, optimal performance.
Introduction
Most physiological processes are
temperature-dependent. Ectothermic
animals, which do not maintain a constant
body temperature, are thus subject to
fluctuation in the rate at which they can
perform many vital tasks. By regulating
body temperature behaviorally, however,
many reptiles can maximize performance
capability (Huey 1982a). In some cases,
maximal performance temperature might
differ for different tasks. For example, a
wealth of behavioral data indicates that
many lizards and snakes increase their body
temperature after feeding, which suggests
that digestion has a higher optimal
temperature than other activities (reviewed
in Huey 1982a).
Early work centered on the thermal
dependence of sub-organismal traits (e.g.,
enzyme activity, muscle contractile speed
[Huey and Stevenson 1979]). In many
cases, however, the effect of temperature
on the functional capacities (e.g., sprint
speed, critical thermal maximum
temperature) cannot be predicted by study
at sub-organismal levels (e.g., Licht 1967;
Marsh and Bennett 1985, 1986).
Consequently, recent studies have focused
on whole-organism performance. The
thermal dependence of sprinting ability has
been studied in great detail. Maximum
sprinting speed and/or endurance in many
species occurs at the temperature they most
frequently experience in nature (Bennett
1980); however, nocturnal lizards appear
exceptional (Huey and Bennett 1987; Huey
etal. 1989). The thermal sensitivity of few
other whole-organism locomotor
performance measures has been determined
for lizards. Here I report the thermal
sensitivity of tokay geckos (Gekko gecko)
[Fig. 1] for two ecologically relevant tasks,
maximum sprinting and clinging capability.
I ask whether maximum performance
capability occurs at the relatively low
temperatures most commonly experienced
by geckos (Huey et al. 1989) and whether
the optimal temperature is the same for the
two performance measures.
Methods
Tokays are relatively large geckos found
on trees and walls throughout southeastern
Asia (Smith 1935). Lizards were captured
on Phuket Island, Phuket Province,
Thailand, and transported to the University
of California, Berkeley in late September
1987. They were maintained in 30 x 17 x 9
cm plastic shoeboxes at ambient
temperatures and provided with water and
crickets ad libitum. An ontogenetic series
was used in this study (11 individuals;
snout-vent length: 85-180 mm; mass: 10-
140 g).
All trials were conducted in a walk-in
environmental chamber in the Museum of
Vertebrate Zoology, University of
1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 55
FIG. 1 . Gekko gecko from Phuket Province, Thailand.
California, Berkeley, within a month of
capture. Lizards were placed in the chamber
at least one hour prior to performance
measurement. Humidity, which could not
be regulated, was determined on several
occasions using a Bacharach sling
psychrometer.
Clinging capability was measured by
placing lizards on a plexiglass plate and, at
a gradual and steady rate, lifting the end of
the plate so that the lizard was clinging with
its head directed down. The angle at which
the lizard fell from the plate was recorded
(protocol modified from Emerson and Diehl
1980; Alberch 1981). Lizards that jumped
from the plate were not included in the
analysis. As lizards began to slide, they
usually attempted to maintain their grip by
moving and re-applying their toe pads
regardless of temperature. There was no
evidence that temperature affected the
lizards' efforts to prevent sliding and falling
from the experimental plate.
One trial per lizard was conducted per
temperature. Performance at nine
temperatures (12, 16, 17, 22, 24, 31 [three
times], 34, 35, 41; the order of
temperatures is presented in figure 2) was
measured over a six-day period. On some
days, two trials were conducted.
Sprint capability was measured by
placing lizards at the end of a 2.25 m
trackway covered with a rough rubber
surface and inducing them to run by
repeated taps to the tail (protocol following
Huey 1982b; Huey et al. 1989; Garland
1985). As the lizard ran, it interrupted light
beams stationed every 0.25 m. The time
elapsed during each interval was computed
by a Compaq personal computer, the fastest
single interval during four trials, conducted
at hourly intervals, was considered the
maximum speed for that lizard at that
Vol. 3, p. 56
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
155
20 30
Temperature
1.50
.25
1.00
25 35
Temperature
FIG. 2. Clinging ability (mean + 1 s.e.) at
different temperatures. Clinging ability is
measured as the angle of the plate at which a lizard
lost its grip and fell. The points are numbered by
the order in which the trials were conducted.
temperature. Lizards that did not sprint at
maximal capability on any of the trials at a
given temperature, as judged by their gait,
were not included in the calculations for
that temperature. Lizards were tested at
five temperatures (30, 36, 19, 26, 41°C, in
that order), one temperature per day, over
an eight-day period. Trials were never held
on three consecutive days. A second trial at
30°C was held at the conclusion of the
study to determine whether a performance
decline had occurred. Animals whose
performance decreased > 30 % were
excluded from the analysis.
Results
Clinging performance is temperature-
dependent, with a peak at 17°C (Fig. 2). A
non-linear equation (In [clinging ability] =
0.99 + 2.69 * In [temp] - 0.45 *
{In [temp]}2; F28 = 5.08, P < 0.05)
better fits the data than a linear regression
(Fli9 = 2.77, P>0.10).
Although between-day variation exists in
clinging ability at a given temperature, no
general pattern of increased or decreased
performance over the duration of the study
exists. For example, three trials were
conducted at 31 °C. The second trial had
the lowest mean, whereas the last trial had
the highest mean. Three other sets of trials
were conducted at approximately the same
temperature (16-17°C, 22-24°C, 34-35°C).
In two cases, performance ability decreased
FIG. 3. Sprint speed (mean ± 1 s.e.) at different
temperatures. The numbers indicate which
represents the first and the second 30° trials.
in the second trial, but in the third case it
increased.
Sprinting capability is also temperature-
dependent (Fig. 3). Maximal performance
ability occurs at 36-4 1°C, but interpretation
of the results is difficult because
performance ability declined over the
course of the experiment, as evidenced by
the difference in sprinting ability in the two
sets of trials at 30°C. Despite this decline,
several results are clear from inspection of
Fig. 3: 1. performance at 36°C (tested 8
July) is slightly higher than at 30 (7 July);
performance at 40°C (tested 13 July, after
all trials except the second set at 30) is
nearly as high or higher than all other
temperatures; 3. performance at 30°C (16
July) is greater than performance at 26°C
(11 July), which, in turn, is greater than
performance at 19°C (10 July).
Consequently, even if performance steadily
decreased over time, it is reasonable to
conclude that maximal sprint performance
occurs around 36-4 1°C
Discussion
Sprinting and clinging are ecologically
relevant performance measures for geckos,
but their optimal performance temperatures
differ greatly for tokays. Sprint
performance is greatest at relatively high
temperatures, as is the case for a number of
other nocturnal gecko species (Huey et al.
1989) and the nocturnal skink
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 57
Eremiascincus fasciolatus (Huey and
Bennett 1987). Clinging capability, the
thermal dependence of which has never
previously been investigated, is maximal at
considerably lower (approx. 17°C)
temperatures.
It is difficult to envision how such
different optima could evolve adaptively.
Most lizards sprint maximally at
temperatures close to those they normally
experience (Huey 1982a; Huey et al.
1989). The low optimal temperature for
clinging matches the field temperatures of
many active nocturnal geckos (Huey et al.
1989). However, many nocturnal geckos
bask and/or are active to some extent during
the day (Bustard 1967, 1968; Werner and
Whitaker 1978; Nagy and Knight 1989).
Consequently, the high optimal temperature
for sprinting seen in many nocturnal lizards
might represent adaptation for diurnal
capability (Huey and Bennett 1987; Huey et
al. 1989). Nonethless, it seems implausible
that one aspect of locomotion, sprint
performance, should be selected at high
temperatures, whereas another important
component of effective movement,
clinging, should be favored at considerably
lower temperatures.
As an alternative explanation, the
differences in thermal optima might result
from differences in evolutionary lability of
the two performance capabilities and thus
represent constraints on adaptive evolution
in either sprinting or clinging ability. To
understand why these performance abilities
are affected differently by temperature, a
better understanding is needed of their
underlying physical and physiological
bases (e.g., Garland 1984, 1985; Marsh
and Bennett 1985, 1986). In many species
of lizards, sprint performance is maximal at
temperatures close to the critical thermal
maximum (Huey and Bennett 1987; Huey
et al. 1989). The cause for this linkage is
unclear. However, if geckos must be able
to survive diurnal temperatures (either
because they intentionally maintain high
temperatures to maximize other processes,
or because environmental conditions
preclude the maintenance of lower
temperatures), then they would have to
evolve high critical thermal maxima. The
high sprint performance maximum might be
a correlated effect of this physiological
adaptation to high temperatures and not be
adaptive per se (Huey et al. 1989).
Clinging capability depends upon both
physical and physiological processes.
Geckos cling to smooth surfaces by dry
adhesion. The subdigital lamellar pads of
geckos are covered with millions of
microscopic setal hairs. When the pads are
adpressed to a surface, these hairs form
intermolecular bonds with molecules on the
surface of the substrate (Hiller 1975). If
the surface energy (a measure of the
number of free electrons on the surface of
the substrate) is relatively high, then
enough bonds can form to support the
lizard. Because these bonds result from the
activity of electrons, the forces theoretically
should be temperature-independent over the
range of temperatures in this study.
However, geckos have an elaborate
muscular and vascular system for the
adpression and removal of their toe pads
(Russell 1975); the thermal dependence of
these muscles has not been investigated.
The poor clinging performance of geckos at
10-12°C is clearly the result of
physiological incapacitation. At that
temperature, geckos were generally
inactive, moved slowly and infrequently,
and even rarely bit or barked when
handled. In contrast to trials at higher
temperatures, the lizards did not attempt to
adjust their pads or posture when the plate
was tilted and quickly lost their hold. More
research is required to determine whether
the performance decline at temperatures
above 17-1 8°C results from decreased
capability of the muscles and enzymes
involved in clinging.
One possible confounding effect in the
clinging experiments is the variation in
absolute humidity. Moisture might
decrease the formation of high-energy
intermolecular bonds. Absolute humidity
in the environmental chamber was
measured at several temperatures and
increased from 8.5 Barrs at 11.9°C to 25.1
Barrs at 34.3°C (relative humidity,
Vol. 3, p. 58
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
however, was greatest at intermediate
temperatures). Consequently, the greater
absolute humidity at higher temperatures in
the environmental chamber might have
caused a decrease in clinging ability.
Further research is needed to investigate to
what extent humidity affects clinging.
Although different processes may often
be maximized at different temperatures,
rarely is the difference as great as is
observed between sprinting and clinging in
tokay geckos (Huey 1982a). One would
not expect these geckos to need maximum
ability at these aspects of locomotion at
such different temperatures, but neither
would one expect the physiological
sensitivity of different systems to be so
different. Interestingly, the optimal
temperature for hearing sensitivity in the
tokay gecko is intermediate between the
sprinting and clinging optima (Werner
1976). Further research is required to
understand the processes shaping and
constraining performance evolution.
Acknowledgments
I thank T. Papenfuss and R. Macey for
providing the geckos, R. Jones for
assistance with equipment, R. Huey for
advice on racing geckos, J. Herron for
providing me with a pre-publication
manuscript, and A. Bauer, H. Greene and
R. Huey for constructive comments on a
previous version of this paper.
Literature Cited
ALBERCH, P. 1981. Convergence and parallelism
in foot morphology in the neotropical
salamander genus Bolitoglossa. I. Function.
Evolution 35:84-100.
BENNETT, A. F. 1980. The thermal dependence of
lizard behavior. Animal Behavior 28:752-762.
BUSTARD, H. R. 1967. Activity cycle and
thermoregulation in the Australian gecko,
Gehyra variegata. Copeia 1967:753-758.
BUSTARD, H. R. 1968. The ecology of the
Australian gecko Heteronotia binoei in northern
New South Wales. Journal of Zoology, London
156:483-497.
EMERSON, S. B., AND D. DIEHL. 1980. Toe pad
morphology and mechanisms of sticking in
frogs. Biological Journal of the Linnaen
Society 13:199-216.
GARLAND, T., JR. 1984. Physiological correlates
of locomotory performance in a lizard: an
allometric approach. American Journal of
Physiology 247:R806-R815.
GARLAND, T., JR. 1985. Ontogenetic and
individual variation in size, shape and speed in
the Australian agamid lizard Amphibolurus
nuchalis. Journal of Zoology, London (A)
207:425-439.
HILLER, U. 1975. Comparative studies on the
functional morphology of two gekkonid lizards.
Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society
73:278-282.
HUEY, R. B. 1982a. Temperature, physiology,
and the ecology of reptiles. Pp. 25-91. In C.
Gans and F. H. Pough (Eds.), Biology of the
Reptilia, Vol. 12. Academic Press, New York,
USA.
HUEY, R. B. 1982b. Phylogenetic and
ontogenetic determinants of sprint performance
in some diurnal Kalahari lizards. Koedoe 25:43-
48.
HUEY, R. B., AND A. F. BENNETT. 1987.
Phylogenetic studies of coadaptation: preferred
temperatures versus optimal performance
temperatures of lizards. Evolution 41:1098-
1115.
HUEY, R. B., P. H. NIEWIAROWSKI, J.
KAUFMANN, AND J. C. HERRON. 1989.
Thermal biology of nocturnal ectotherms: is
sprint performance of geckos maximal at low
body temperatures? Physiological Zoology
62:488-504.
HUEY, R. B., AND R. D. STEVENSON. 1979.
Integrating thermal physiology and ecology of
ectotherms: a discussion of approaches.
American Zoologist 19:357-366.
LICHT, P. 1967. Thermal adaptation in the
enzymes of lizards in relation to preferred body
temperature. Pp. 131-145. In C. L. Prosser
(Ed.), Mechanisms of Temperature Adaptation.
American Association for the Advancement of
Science, Washington, D. C.
MARSH, R. L., AND A. F. BENNETT. 1985.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 59
Thermal dependence of isotonic contractile
properties of skeletal muscle and sprint
performance of the lizard Dipsosaurus dorsalis.
Journal of Comparative Physiology B 155:541-
551.
MARSH, R. L., AND A. F. BENNETT. 1986.
Thermal dependence of contractile properties of
skeletal muscle from the lizard Sceloporus
occidentalis with comments on methods for
fitting and comparing force-velocity curves.
Journal of Experimental Biology 126:63-77.
NAGY, K. A., AND M. H. KNIGHT. 1989.
Comparative field energetics of a Kalahari skink
(Mabuya striata) and gecko (Pachydactylus
bibroni). Copeia 1989:13-17.
RUSSELL, A. P. 1975. A contribution to the
functional analysis of the foot of the Tokay,
Gekko gecko (Reptilia: Gekkonidae). Journal of
Zoology, London 176:437-476.
SMITH, M. A. 1935. The Fauna of British India,
Reptilia and Amphibia. Vol. 2 — Sauria.
Taylor and Francis, Ltd., London. 440 pp.
WERNER, Y. L. 1976. Optimal temperatures for
inner-ear performance in gekkonid lizards.
Journal of Experimental Zoology 195:319-352.
WERNER, Y. L., AND A. H. WHITAKER. 1978.
Observations and comments on the body
temperatures of some New Zealand reptiles.
New Zealand Journal of Zoology 5:375-393.
I April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 60-63
Mating Call Structures of the Chinese Frog, Rana nigromaculata
(Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae)
YONG MU1 AND ERMI ZHAO1
^Chengdu Institute of Biology. P.O. Box 416, Academia Sinica, Chengdu, China
Abstract. -Mating calls of the Chinese Pond Frog, Rana nigromaculata at three localities were recorded
and compared. The calls of R. nigromaculata are short in duration and consist of a few notes. Each note
has several distinct pulses. The call structures of northern and central China are different from those of
Sichuan, hence we tentatively regard them as different subspecies.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae, Rana nigromaculata, mating calls.
Introduction
Rana nigromaculata occurs widely in the
lower Amur and Ussuri river valleys
(USSR), Korea, Japan, and throughout
northeastern and midwestern China. In
China it occurs in all but Xinjiang, Tibet
and Guangxi autonomous regions, and
Yunnan, Taiwan, and Hainan provinces.
As far as we know, no paper has been
published in China analyzing the mating
calls of Chinese anurans.
The mating call of frogs is a useful clue
in revealing systematic and evolutionary
relationships. Vocalizations are species-
specific in anurans, and serve as isolating
mechanisms. Therefore, some taxonomic
revisions have been based primarily on call
differences [see Kuramato (1977) for
review].
Methods
Calls of Rana nigromaculata were
recorded in 1988 at three localities. Several
calls of a single male were recorded on 19
March, in the suburbs of Hongya County,
about 100 km southwest of Chengdu,
Sichuan Province. The frog was calling
from a stone near water. The water
temperature was 19°C.
A number of calls from three males were
recorded at East Lake Park, Wuchang,
Wuhan, Hubei Province on 17 June. The
frogs called while standing in shallow
water shaded by grass. The water
temperature was 22°C.
The calls of 10 males were recorded at
Wofoshi, Xiangshan Park, Beijing, on 28
May. Male frogs were found calling in
surroundings similar to those of frogs in
Hubei Province. The water temperature
was 24°C.
Temperature records were always taken
in the vicinity of calling males. Calls were
recorded with a Sony TCS-370 cassette
recorder and a Feidec TSM-91 microphone.
Sonograms were prepared with Kay 7800
and Kay 7900 sonographs. For the
analysis of mating calls, standard (2.56
sec) sonograms with a 150 Hz bandwidth
filter were used.
When a call was composed of several
groups of pulses, each group was termed a
note. The main acoustic parameters
measured were: duration of call, number of
notes and pulses, pulse repetition rate
(number of pulses per second),
fundamental frequency, and dominant
frequency.
Results and Discussion
The vocalizations of Rana nigromaculata
consist of 4-10 notes, and each note has 3-
7 distinct pulses. The higher frequency
parts (above 2 kHz) are usually absent in
the first few notes (1-3). Time intervals
between pulses tend to become longer at the
end of the call. In all localities, the frog's
frequency band ranges from 0 to 8 kHz.
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 61
TABLE 1 . Analysis of the calls of Rana nigromaculata. The dominant frequency and pulse repetition rate
of R. nigromaculata from Hongya, Sichuan are about half of those recorded at the other localities. Note the
divergence of the Sichuan call structure from northern (Beijing) and central (Wuhan) China.
Their fundamental frequencies are
approximately identical (0.5 kHz). Since
fundamental frequencies are dependent on
the oscillations resulting from air passing
over the vocal cord, causing it to vibrate at
a frequency which is a function of the mass
and tension of the cord (Duellman and
Trueb 1986), it is likely that the frogs have
a common vocal structure.
As well as multi-note calls, Rana
nigromaculata has a single-note call.
Frogs in northern and central China
(Beijing and Wuhan) emit this sound
repeatedly and usually in groups. Each
group is composed of 5-10 single-note
calls. In Hongya, the single-note call could
rarely be heard. Because R. nigromaculata
in Sichuan is peripheral in distribution, we
believe that the call structure in northern
and central China represent the basic
structure, and that the Sichuan structure
was derived from it.
Table 1 and Figure 1 clearly demonstrate
the divergence of call structure between
northern and central China, and Sichuan.
In comparing the three main acoustic
parameters, call duration, pulse repetition
rate, and mean dominant frequency, a
general pattern is evident (Zweifel 1959).
Pulse repetition rate and dominant
frequency correlate positively with
temperature, but duration of call correlates
negatively with temperature. However, we
feel that this is not sufficient to explain the
differences between the populations. At a
temperature only 3 and 5°C lower than in
Wuhan and Beijing, respectively, the
dominant frequency and pulse repetition
rate of Sichuan Rana nigromaculata are
about half of those found in the former
localities. The length of calls of Sichuan
frogs is approximately equal to the
maximum call length of frogs from the
Wuhan and Beijing localities, and their
vocal sacs are of the same size. In
addition, they have very similar
fundamental frequencies. We conclude that
they have nearly identical sound-producing
Vol. 3, p. 62
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TYPE B/65 SONA&Ram * KAY
TYPE B/65 SONAGBAM e KAY ELEMETRICS CO PINE BROOK. N.J.
fc fa t,- it
8
1-
p p
I f I f M
I 1 I I i t'
TYPE B/65 SONAGRAM * KAY ELEMETRICS CO PINE BROOK N.J.
JTT
W'.W-%
;h i i i
1 :
Hi'
'
in w it ftt i
i
"V I' Hil
HM 1H
MUM
f
in
r1
i
FIG. 1. Sonagrams of the calls of R ana nigromaculata in China, a. Seven note call from Beijing on
May 27, 1988. The water temperature was 24°C. b. One 6 note call and two 1 note calls from Wuchang,
Hubei Province, June 17, 1988. The water temperature was 22°C. c. Two 5 note calls from Hongya,
Sichuan Province, March 19, 1988. The water temperature was 19°C.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 63
structures, but different controlling
mechanisms.
In acknowledging that our analysis of
frog calls may not be exhaustive, we can
only tentatively suggest that the Sichuan
population of Rana nigromaculata is a
separate subspecies from the Wuhan and
Beijing populations.
Acknowledgments
We would like to thank Theodore J.
Papenfuss (Museum of Vertebrate
Zoology, University of California,
Berkeley) for donating the sonograph
paper, and Mitsuru Kuramoto of the
Fukuoka University of Education, Japan.
Literature Cited
DUELLMAN, W. E. AND L. TRUEB. 1986.
Biology of Amphibians. McGraw-Hill, New
York. 670 pp.
KURAMOTO, M. 1977. Mating call structures of
the Japanese pond frogs, Rana nigromaculata
and Rana brevipoda (Amphibia, Anura,
Ranidae). Journal of Herpetology 11(3):249-
254.
ZWEIFEL, R. G. 1959. Effect of temperature on
call of the frog, Bombina variegata. Copeia
1959(4):322-327.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 64-66 1
Four Remarkable Reptiles from South China Sea Islands,
Hong Kong Territory
JAMES LAZELL1 AND WENHUA LU1
lThe Conservation Agency, Rhode Island 02835, USA
Key Words: Reptilia, Squamata, Hong Kong, distribution.
FIG. 1. Hong Kong and nearby islands. 1. Hei Ling Chau. 2. Shek Kwu Chau. 3. High West
Pokfulam, Hong Kong Island.
Introduction
There are at least one hundred vegetated
islands, presumably supporting amphibians
and/or reptiles, within the Hong Kong
Territory. This is estimated to be about
three percent of the total number of
continental shelf islands in the South China
Sea between Taiwan and Hainan Dao.
Nevertheless, the number of endemic and
isolated species documented from the
territory in the comprehensive work of
Karsen, Lau, and Bogadek (1986) is high:
four endemics and at least fifteen widely
disjunct populations. Here we add two
species not previously recorded (both
widely disjunct) and new records of species
poorly documented before (Fig. 1).
Voucher specimens are in the Museum of
Comparative Zoology (MCZ), Harvard
University.
Dibamus cf. bourreti
(White-tailed Two-footed Lizard)
A single specimen, MCZ 172041, was
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 65
collected by Anthony Bogadek, 1 April
1987, on Hei Ling Chau ca. 10 km
southwest of Victoria, Hong Kong — a
range extension northeast for the genus,
and family Dibamidae of ca. 800 km
(Lazell 1988).
The specimen, a 177 mm SVL male,
was sent to Allen Greer, Australian
Museum, Sydney, for identification. He
believed the specimen was "probably"
Dibamus bourreti (in litt., 9 May 1988).
However, we note the following sharp
distinctions from D. bourreti as diagnosed
and described by Greer (1985: 148): the
rostral suture is not complete, not present
from lip to nostril but only posterior to the
nostril. There is a prominent labial suture.
There are no preanal or tibial pores.
Dibamis bourreti is diagnosed as having a
complete rostral suture, no labial suture,
and four preanal pores on each side, even
in a female — the highest count in Dibamus.
This specimen, MCZ 172041, has 23
scale rows at midbody, six scales fronting
the hindlimb where Greer (1985:120)
shows D. novaeguinae having four, and
six rows of preanal scales where Greer
(1985:120) shows D. novaeguinae having
three. The hindlimb is 2.7% of SVL. The
tail is 22.6% of SVL. In life this specimen
was lilac of lavender-gray shading to buff
on the head and chalk-white on the tail. It
is much paler and less contrastingly marked
than the Guangxi D. bourreti illustrated by
Tian and Jiang (1986). See Figure 2.
Typhlops albiceps
This tiny snake, apparently rare
throughout its range, was known from
Hong Kong Island only on the basis of two
specimens collected in 1959 and 1966
(Karlsen et al. 1986), now in the British
Museum (Natural History): BMNH
1954.1.13.4 and BMNH 1983.946,
respectively. It was rediscovered 27 May
1988 at High West, Pokfulam, Hong Kong
Island by Sandra Brown (Macklin 1988).
The species appears reasonably common at
this site. Voucher specimens are at the St.
Louis School, West Point, Hong Kong
(curated by Anthony Bogadek) and at MCZ
FIG. 2. Dibamus sp. from Hei Ling Chau. The
rostral, R, lacks a suture from lip to nostril. A
labial suture, L, is present.
(MCZ 173290).
Lance (1976) did not recognize
"Typhlina" or "Ramphotyphops" and
neither do we. The putative distinction
from Typhops is entirely in male genetalia
(McDowell 1974). Because females are
indistinguishable, recognition of
"Typhlina" or "Ramphotyphops" directly
violates the principles of systematic
zoology (Mayr et al. 1953) and the
principles of animal taxonomy (Simpson
1961).
This is the only species of Typhlops in
China with 18 scale rows. It is very
slender, the head spatulate. MCZ 173290
is 155.5 mm SVL with a 2.5 mm tail. The
dorsum is wood brown shading to buff on
the head. The chin is near-white; this color
extends posteriorly for 10 scales onto the
throat The tail tip is near- white; this color
extends anteroventrally on all 10 subcaudal
scales and 4 rows anterior to the vent.
Dendrelaphis pictus
(Painted Bronze Back Snake)
This elegant snake is known from
Guangdong, Guangxi, and Yunnan (Hu et
al. 1980), and from Hong Kong on the
basis of a single report (Wall 1903). One
of us (Lazell) has searched both BMNH
and MCZ for this specimen with no
success. Peaker (1987) criticized Karsen et
al. (1986) for including this species in the
Hong Kong fauna. Deletion would have
Vol. 3, p. 66
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 1. Some scale counts for Chinese
Ahaetulla prasina.
been premature. Between 1971 and 1984
Dr. Barry Hollinrake, resident of Shek
Kwu Chau, a small island 1.3 km south of
Lanuau, amassed a collection of 35 snakes
on the island of 9 species, now housed at
MCZ (Boalch 1988). Among these is a
beautiful female Dendrelaphis pictus with
15 dorsal scale rows, 171 ventrals, and 131
subcaudals: MCZ 173278.
The ventral and subcaudal counts of the
Shek Kwu Chau specimen are significantly
lower than those given by Hu et al. (1980:
39): 184 ventrals (females 186-193) and
141-169 subcaudals (females 141-169).
Ahaetulla prasina (Jade Vine Snake)
Two specimens of this spectacular
snake, never previously recorded in Hong
Kong Territory, are in the Hollinrake
collection from Shek Kwu Chau: male,
MCZ 173303, and female, MCZ 173304.
Their scale counts are much higher than
those given by Pope (1935) of Hu et al.
(1980) for this widespread South China
species: Table 1.
Literature Cited
BOALCH, K. 1988. Snakes alive —a specialist's
delight. South China Post 154(1 13):3.
GREER, A. 1985. The relationships of the lizard
genera Anelytropsis and Dibamus. Journal of
Herpetology 19:116-156.
HU, B., M. HUANG, Z. XIE, E. ZHAO, Y. JIANG,
Z YU, AND J. MA. 1980. Illustrated snakes of
China. Science and Technology Press,
Shanghai.
KARSEN, S. M. LAU, AND A. BOGADEK. 1986
Hong Kong amphibians and reptiles. Urban
Council, Hong Kong. 136 pp.
LANCE, V. A. 1976. The land vertebrates of
Hong Kong, Pp. 6-22. In B. Lofts (ed). The
fauna of Hong Kong. Royal Asiatic Society,
Hong Kong.
LAZELL, J. 1988. A leg up —by 800 kilometers.
Assoc. Pacific Systematists Newsletter 5:2.
MACKLIN, S. 1988.
biologists bewildered.
Post 154(147):!.
Reclusive reptile has
South China Morning
MAYR, E., E. G. LINSLEY, AND R. L. USFNGER.
1953. Methods and principles of systematic
zoology. McGraw-Hill, New York. 336 pp.
MCDOWELL, S. 1974. A catalogue of the snakes
of New Guinea and the Solomons, with special
reference to those in the Bernice P. Bishop
Museum 1. Scolecophidia. Journal of
Herpetology 8:1-57.
PEAKER, M. 1987. Review of Karsen et al.
(1986). The Herptile 12(l):36-37.
POPE, C. H. 1935. The reptiles of China.
Natural History of Central Asia 10, American
Museum of Natural History, New York. 604
pp.
SIMPSON, G. G. 1961. Principles of animal
taxonomy. Columbia University Press, New
York. 247 pp.
TIAN, W. AND Y. JIANG. 1986. Chinese
amphibian and reptile identification manual.
Science Press, Beijing. 364 pp.
WALL, F. 1903. A prodromus of the snakes
hitherto recorded from China, Japan, and the
Loo Choo Islands; with some notes.
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of
London 84-102.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 67-84
On the Independence of the Colchis Center of Amphibian and Reptile
Speciation
BORIS S. TUNIYEV1
^Causasian State Biosphere Reserve, Sochi, USSR
Abstract. -The Colchis region of Western Transcaucasia is characterized by a rather uniform thermal
regimen, corresponding to a subtropical climate. The Colchis forests contain an extraordinary abundance
and diversity of tree, shrub, and vine species. The herpetofauna of the Colchis forests is surprisingly poor,
despite its uniqueness.
Key Words: Amphibia, Reptilia, USSR, Caucasus, biogeography.
Introduction
The herpetofauna of Western
Transcaucasia is not homogeneous, due to
the different age and genesis of the species
distributions. Along with autochtonous
and endemic forms, one can find species
whose main areas of distribution are in the
European part of the USSR and in the
Eastern Mediterranean. At the same time, a
number of species which have main
distributional centers in the Colchis occur
beyond the bounds of Western
Transcaucasia, in other parts of the
Caucasian Isthmus. For these reasons, it is
necessary to define the Colchis
herpetofauna and to determine its place in
the fauna of reptiles and amphibians of the
Caucasian Isthmus as a whole.
Research on this issue started with the
works of Nordmann (1840), Derjugin
(1899), Silantyev (1903), Brauner (1905),
and Nesterov (1911). However, the first
well-grounded definition of the fauna in
question from a zoogeographical point of
view was presented in the works of
Satunin (1912). Satunin wrote in 1910,
"So far I cannot say much about the genesis
of the fauna of this region called Western
Transcaucasia. This country with its
evergreen plants and scanty fauna
resembles a piece of the Mediterranean in
the narrow sense of the word. True, here
are endemic species and forms, but not a
single genus of vertebrate is unrepresented
in the countries of the Mediterranean.
Often they are inhabited by the same
species. The question is whether this fauna
has appeared from the west or is it the
remainder of the fauna that has populated
densely the shores of the Black Sea at one
time. It is impossible to answer these
questions at the present level of our
knowledge. But even now I can definitely
say that this fauna by its origin, has nothing
in common with the faunas in other regions
of the Caucasus."
In 1912, Satunin divided the Caucasian
Isthmus into five subregions and 11
districts, including the Colchis in the West-
Transcaucasian district of the Littoral
subregion.
Among other merits of this work by
Satunin, one cannot but mention the fact
that for the first time, he defined in an exact
way the Colchis region proper. He defined
the northern border as the spurs of the Main
Caucasian Range up to the basin of the
Tuapse River, the southern border as the
Pontic Range, and the eastern border as the
Arsijanskij Range. The valley of the Rioni
River and the adjacent southern slopes of
the Main Range were defined as the central
part of the region. Satunin emphasized the
depauperate herpetofauna of this region on
one hand, and the presence of endemic
species such as Vipera kaznakowi and
Bufo verrucosissimus on the other hand.
Nikolsky (1911) assigned the entire
Caucasus, excluding eastern Precaucasia,
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 68
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
to the Mediterranean. However, he could
not differentiate the forest and the alpine
belts of the Greater Caucasus, because of
the absence of data.
Results and Discussion
Investigations of the last decades made it
possible to add the majority of the species
of the Colchis herpetofauna to an overall
picture of Colchis faunal distributions
(Turov 1928; Bartenev and Reznikova
1935; Khozatsky 1941; Milyanovskiy
1957; Bannikov et al. 1977;
Negmedzyanov and Bakradze 1977; Orlova
1973, 1978a, 1978b; Golubev 1980, 1985;
Tuniyev 1983, 1985). In addition there has
been a revision of the taxonomic status of
such forms as Vipera kaznakowi
(Vedmederja et al. 1986; Orlov and
Tuniyev 1986a, 1990 this volume), Lacerta
agilis (Peters 1960), L. derjugini
(Bartenev and Reznikova 1931; Orlova
1978a ; Bischoff 1982, 1984), L. saxicola
(Darevsky 1967; Darevsky and Vedmederja
1977), Anguis fragilis colchicus (Lukina
1965; Scherbak and Scherban 1980), and
others.
Accumulation of this information along
with works on fossil amphibians and
reptiles of the Caucasus (Vekua et al. 1979;
Chkhikvadze 1981, 1983, 1984; Bakradze
and Chkhikvadze 1977; Zerova and
Chkhikvadze 1984; Yefimov and
Chkhikvadze 1987) have made it possible
to revise the zoogeography of the region.
Darevsky (1957) singled out seven
different groups of species and subspecies
of the herpetofauna in the Caucasus, based
on their origin. Among the species
representatives of the region of interest to
us, it is necessary to pay attention to
Lacerta strigata (Asia Minor species),
Emys orbicularis, Anguis fragilis,
Coronella austriaca, Elaphe quatuorlineates
sauromates, Natrix natrix (European boreal
species), Testudo graeca, Natrix tessellata
(Mediterranean species), Pseudopus
apodus, Coluber najadum (east-
Mediterranean species), and Lacerta
saxicola, L. praticola, L. derjugini, L.
media (autochthonous species). The
Colchis, however, was not distinguished as
an independent center of speciation in this
work.
Scherbak (1981) included the Colchis in
the Caucasian Region of the Mediterranean
Province. He suggested that the typical
species of the region were Mertensiella
caucasica, Pelodytes caucasicus, Lacerta
saxicola-complex and others. However,
the Colchis proper was again not
distinguished as an independent center of
herpetofaunal formation.
For the analysis of the herpetofauna of
the Colchis proper, it is necessary to
exactly define the term "the Colchis
phytolandscapes", and to decide what types
of vegetation are universally recognized as
"Colchis types". Albov (1885) was the
first to clearly depict plant landscapes of
the Colchis. He singled out a region,
unique for Russia, of mountain limestone
flora which had been developing mainly
autochthonously in a large refugium with
numerous endemic and relict species and
even genera. Kolakovskiy (1980) regarded
the Colchis flora as basically forest and
alpine-meadow, and suggested that its main
phytolandscapes had existed since old times
with changes only in the composition of
their edificators, except for the extinct
formation of evergreen subtropical forests
in the lower mountain belt. The tertiary-
relict character of the forest mesophile flora
and vegetation is fully revealed here due to
slight changes in this region's climatic
conditions (Kuznetsov 1891). The most
characteristic features of the tertiary-relict
Colchis forest are: extraordinary
abundance and diversity of tree and shrub
species, impossibility of singling out the
dominant species (which is also
characteristic of tropical forest with extreme
density of trees), abundance of vines and
epiphytes, and almost total absence of grass
cover. All these attributes make the Colchis
forest similar in many aspects to a tropical
rain forest (Pavlov 1984). According to
Sinskaya (1933), the Colchis forest
vegetation underwent three main stages of
development: the tropical forest; the forest
of Colchis type, but rich and covering a
wider area; and last, the modern Colchis
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 69
forest.
The Colchis type of vegetation includes a
number of phytocenoses differing in
structure, composition, and ecological
peculiarities: it may be mixed
(polydominant), or may be presented by
cenosis of one or two species, but the
common and obligatory attribute of
phytocenosis of the Colchis type is an
abundance of tertiary relicts. The area with
Colchis type vegetation is characterized by
a rather monotonous thermal regimen,
corresponding to a subtropical climate, but
with highly diverse soils (Gulisashvili et al.
1975).
The herpetofauna of the Colchis forests
is surprisingly poor, despite its uniqueness.
The species composition is different in the
southeastern and northwestern parts of the
Colchis compared to the other portions of
its territory. Species such as Mertensiella
caucasica, Lacerta clarkorum, L. parvula,
and L. mixta, whose distributions are
connected with forests growing on acid
soils above volcanic rocks, are found on
the western slopes of the Adzharo-
Imeretinsky, Shavshetsky and Lazistansky
(Pontic) mountain ranges. Similarly,
floristic endemics of this part of the Colchis
{Rhododendron ungernii, Osmanthus
decorus, Betula medwedewii, Epigaea
gaultheriodes, and others), are Adzharo-
Lazistan endemics, sometimes with slight
radiations to the adjoining regions, but are
not Colchis endemics in the broad sense of
the word. The same applies to Lacerta
saxicola darevskii and L. saxicola brauneri
which are widespread in the northwestern
part of the Colchis, but are absent in the
central and southeastern Colchis. These
animals, by analogy with floristic endemics
{Allium candolleanum, Campanula
mirabilis, C. bzybica, C. calcarea, C.
jadvigae, Genista abchasica, Gentiana
paradoxa, Omphalodes kusnetzovii, and
others) are northern-Colchis endemics. For
example, of the 450 endemic Colchis
species of flora, 83 (25%) are endemics of
the northern Colchis (Adzinba 1980).
Triturus vittatus ophryticus, T. vulgaris
lantzi, Bufo verrucosissimus, Pelodytes
caucasicus, Lacerta derjugini, L. agilis
grusinica, Natrix megalocephala, and
Vipera kaznakowi are Colchis endemics in
the broad sense of the word.
In addition to the Colchis endemics,
there are three more ecological-geographical
groups of amphibians and reptiles in the
region. They have similar ecological
characteristics (habitat first of all), and
overlapping geographic distributions.
1. The East-Mediterranean group
consists of Triturus cristatus karelini,
Testudo graeca nikolskii (Fig. 1 ), Lacerta
media, L. praticola pontica, L. strigata,
Pseudopus apodus tracius, Natrix
tessellata, and Coluber najadum. This
group's distribution includes either the
Balkans and the Caucasus or the Balkans,
Crimea, and the Caucasus. According to
ecological characteristics, these are
xeromesophiles or hemixerophiles whose
spreading is related to dry foothills of
Western Transcaucasia up to 200-300 m
above sea level with an annual sum of
temperatures exceeding 5000°C. Thus,
Testudo graeca, Pseudopus apodus, and
Coluber najadum occur in the Colchis on a
narrow seaside strip of land with enclaves
of Mediterranean vegetation from Tuapse to
Pitsunda-Sukhumi. A local population of
L. strigata occurs in the Pitsunda region,
and a local population of L. media occurs
in the environs of Pitsunda and Salme. The
majority of localities of L. praticola and
Natrix tessellata in the Colchis are in the
seaside hills up to 400 m above sea level.
It is only along the valleys of large rivers
like the Shakhe River, the Mzymta River,
the Bzyb River, and others that N .
tessellata penetrates into the Colchis up to
600 m above sea level. Thus the majority
of these species are found either in places
with vegetation of the Mediterranean type,
or in places where the initial Colchis
vegetation has been reduced to zero and the
landscapes resemble the Mediterranean
ones by their thermo-biotopic conditions
(substitute shibliaks and tomillares,
Pitsunda pine groves, foothill post-forest
glades, and landplots with Erica tetraliz,
Juniperus oxicedrus, Pinus pityusa, and
Arbutus andrachne).
Vol. 3, p. 70
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 1. Testudo graeca nikolskii is a Mediterranean species, and in the Colchis it is found only in the
seaside strip of land with enclaves of Mediterranean vegetation.
2. The Caucasian group includes Hyla
arborea schelkownikowi (Fig. 2), Rana
macrocnemis, Lacerta caucasica alpina, L.
rudis, and Vipera dinniki. Distributions of
these species in the Caucasian Isthmus are
broader than those of the Colchis group.
At the same time, the majority of them are
Colchis autochthons. These species are
mesophiles and occur in mesophillous
forest and mountain meadow formations.
This group seems to be of Colchis origin,
retaining close connections with the main
center of the formation. Broader ecological
tolerance in comparison with typical
Colchis species makes it impossible to
include them within the Colchis group.
3. The European group consists of Bufo
viridis, Rana ridibunda, Emys orbicularis,
Anguis fragilis, Natrix natrix, Coronella
austriaca, and Coluber jugularis caspius.
The composition of this group is not
homogeneous. It includes both species
typical for the steppe areas {Bufo viridis
and Coluber jugularis ) and those that are
widely distributed in Europe (all the rest).
Only Anguis fragilis and Coronella
austriaca are widely distributed in the
Colchis. This makes it difficult to
definitely consider them late migrants to the
Caucasus. Other species either occur in
several spots along the Colchis seashore
(B. viridis and Natrix natrix ) or populate a
narrow strip of land along the sea together
with the Mediterranean species (C.
jugularis ) or a somewhat wider strip
(Emys orbicularis and Rana ridibunda ).
Despite the possibility of finding these
species in the typical Colchis forest
formations, the majority of them are still
attributed to the Mediterranean type of
vegetation.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 71
FIG. 2. Hyla arborea schelkownikowi seems to be of a Colchis origin, but because of its broad
ecological tolerance, it is found in a large part of the Caucasian Isthmus.
Let us consider the dispersal and
distribution of the representatives of the
Colchis group in detail. Triturus vittatus
occurs in the territory from the seashore to
the subalpine meadows in all the forest
types. In the place called "the Colchis
Gates" (lowering of the Main Caucasian
Range between Mt. Fisht and Mt.
Chugush) the species crosses over to the
northern slope of the Western Calucasus,
reaching the environs of Goriachij Klutch
and Krasnodar in the northwest and the
basin of the Laba River in the northeast. In
the eastern part of the area, the species
crosses the Adzharo-Imeretinskij mountain
range and reaches the outskirts of Tbilissi-
Oni. It occurs in the Lagodekhi region as
an isolate. Outside the boundaries of the
Colchis this species occurs either in the
Colchis type forests or in their derivatives.
Triturus vulgaris lantzi (Fig. 3) occurs
in the same places in the Colchis as T.
vittatus ophryticus does. Very often both
species are symbiotopic (Tuniyev and
Beregovaya 1986). On the northern slope
of the Western Caucasus, its home range is
wider than that of the previous species, but
it is only through the mesophillous forests
and subalpine meadows that it penetrates
into the Eastern Transcaucasia up to the
Trialet Ridge. The isolated population in
Talysh occurs in the Hirkan forests which
are ecologically and genetically close to the
Colchis forests.
Bufo verrucosissimus (Fig. 4) occurs in
all parts of the Colchis from the sea shore
up to the subalpine forests. On the
northern slope of the Western Caucasus, it
is found on the territory from the environs
Vol. 3, p. 72
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 3. Triturus vulgaris lantzi. This subspecies is widespread throughout the Colchis.
of Krasnodar in the west to the Psebaj
settlement and the Shakhgirej Canyon in the
east, where it is found in the derivatives of
the Colchis forests from 400 m to 1000 m
above sea level. In the Eastern Caucasus it
is found in the Borzhomy Gorge, the
Lagodekhi-Zakataly, and the Talysh region,
where its distribution is limited to the
mesophilous forests, which are abundant in
the Colchis and Hirkan floral elements.
The distribution of Pelodytes caucasicus
(Fig. 5) in the Colchis is more restricted. It
does not occur in the coastal belt and oak-
forests. It is found both in the mesophilous
beech, chestnut, and fir-tree forests, and in
mixed broad-leaved forests with an
evergreen understory. On the northern
slope of the Western Caucasus, its
distribution coincides with that of B.
verrucosissimus, but unlike the latter, it is
not found in deforested places. Its
southeastern distributional limits also
coincide with that of Bufo verrucosissimus.
Pelodytes caucasicus does not occur east
of the Trialet Ridge. There is an isolated
population in the mesophilous forests in the
Lagodekhi-Zakataly region.
Lacerta derjugini has a distribution in
the Colchis similar to P. caucasicus. It
reaches the sub-alpine belt. On the
northern slope of the Western Caucasus, it
is found in the Colchis forest derivatives
from the Belaja River to the Small Laba
River (the Shakhgirej Gorge). The species
penetrates through the Eastern
Transcaucasia up to the Trialet Ridge.
Separate populations occur in north-eastern
Georgia up to Lagodekhi-Zakataly.
Lacerta agilis grusinica (Fig. 6) is
known to occur only on the territory of the
Colchis and the adjoining sea coast up to
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 73
FIG. 4. Bu/o verrucosissimus. This Colchis endemic occurs in the four Colchis refugia.
Novorossijsk. Its vertical distributional
limit is 700 m above sea level, though local
populations can be found in the sub-alpine
belt (Mt. Aishkho and Mt. Uglovoj).
The distribution of Natrix megalocephala
is similar to that of many Colchis species.
It is found from the environs of Tuapse and
Gorjachij Kljutch in the west, to the region
between the Belaja Laba River and the
Small Laba River in the north, eastwards
through the whole territory of the Colchis
up to the Borzhomy Gorge and separately
in the Lagodekhi-Zakataly region (Orlov
and Tuniyev 1986b). In the Colchis it
reaches the sub-alpine belt. In the rest of
the area it does not exceed 1000 m above
sea level.
Elaphe longissima (Fig. 7) occurs in the
region of Novorossijsk and throughout
Western Transcaucasia, except for the mid-
mountains and highlands. There are
isolated populations in the Borzhomy
Gorge, the Lagodekhi-Zakataly region and
the Belaja River basin on the northern slope
of the Western Caucasus.
Vipera kaznakowi (Fig. 8) occurs
throughout the territory of the Colchis up to
1000 m above sea level. On the northern
slope of the Western Caucasus it occurs
between the Belaja River and the Small
Laba River. Separate populations are
known in the Borzhomy Gorge and the
Lagodekhi region.
The dispersal and distribution of Lacerta
saxicola darevskii (Fig. 9), L. s. brauneri,
L. mixta, L. parvula and Mertensiella
caucasica have been analyzed above.
A comparison of the endemic Colchis
species, whose distributions are associated
Vol. 3, p. 74
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 5. Pelodytes caucasicus occurs in all four Colchis refugia.
with forest and meadow formations of the
Colchis type, makes it possible to identify
three more regions in the Caucasian
Isthmus, besides the Western Caucasus
(the Colchis proper), in which the Colchis
herpetofauna occurs. The three regions are:
the Bjelo-Labinskij region on the northern
slope of the Western Caucasus, the
Kakhetinskij (Lagodekhi-Zakataly) region
on the southern slope of the Eastern
Caucasus, and the Borzhomskij region in
Eastern Transcaucasia (Fig. 10). The
comparative composition of the
herpetofauna of these regions is shown in
Table 1.
It is evident from Table 1, that the most
significant differences are found between
the Colchis and the Kahetinskij regions and
the least significant differences are between
the Colchis and the Borzhomskij and the
Belo-Labinskij regions. Taking into
account the above mentioned peculiarities
of distribution of herpetofauna within the
Colchis refugium itself, the differences
become even less significant. In this case,
we deal with three regions smaller in space,
and a wealth of species of the Colchis
herpetofauna that occur in refugia and have
survived off the main territory of the
Colchis.
The Belo-Labinskij region is only
conventionally separated from the Colchis
by the crest of the Main Caucasian
Mountain Range. All the northern Colchis
species, except L. a. grusinica, occur on
the northern slope of the Western Caucasus
in the Belaja and the Small Laba river
drainages. It should be stressed that this
unity is based on the fact that the
characteristic Colchis elements of flora and
vegetation cross over the Main Caucasian
Range in the place known as "the Colchis
Gates" to its northern slope. The basins of
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 75
FIG. 6. Lacerta agilis grusinica is found throughout the main Colchis refugium.
TABLE 1 . Distribution of the endemic Colchis herpetofauna in the main refugia of the Caucasian
Isthmus.
Species
R
Colchis
E G
Bjelo-
Labinskij
I O N
Kakhetinskij Borzhomskij
Triturus vittatus
T. vulgaris lantzi
Mertensiella caucasica
Bufo verrucosissimus
Pelodytes caucasicus
Lacerta derjugini
L. agilis grusinica
L. saxicola darevskii
L. s. brauneri
L. mixta
L. parvula
L. clarkorum
Natrix megalocephala
Elaphe longissima
Vipera kaznakowi
+ + + +
+ + - +
+ - - +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ - - -
+ + - -
+ + - -
+ - - +
+ - - +
+ - - -
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
Total:
15
10
11
Vol. 3, p. 76
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 7. Elaphe longissima. The Colchis refugia populations are disjunct from the main distribution in
Europe.
the Belaja, Tsitse and Laba rivers abound in
those elements. To the north of these
watersheds their distributions are
continuous up to the Skalistij (Rocky)
limestone ridge. Maleyev (1939) has noted
that a part of the Maikop district abounds in
Colchis elements and is inseparable from
the Colchis according to the character of its
flora and vegetation.
The Borzhomskij region is also
conventionally separated from the Colchis
by the Adzhara-Imeretinskij Mountain
Ridge. The flora and vegetation of the
Baniskhevskoje Gorge, the Likanskoje
Gorge, and the upper belt of Mt. Lomis-
Mta, as well as the environs of Bakuriani,
hardly differ from those of the Colchis.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 77
FIG. 8. Vipera kaznakowi occurs throughout the territory of the Colchis up to 1000 m above sea level.
In the isolated eastern Kakhetinskij
region a considerable number of the ancient
Tertiary vegetation representatives survived
due to the warm and humid climate
(Gulisashvili et al. 1975).
Modern distributions of eco-geographic
groups of amphibians and reptiles
distinguished by our scientists have distinct
altitudinal-ecological limits owing to natural
and historical reasons.
Migration of ancestoral species of the
Colchis and the Caucasian groups from the
south apparently took place in the Miocene
when the Caucasian island joined vast
territories of Asia Minor. Colonization of
the Caucasus from the south by different
species of mammals during the early
Miocene has been studied by Vereschagin
(1958), and that of lizards of the Podarchis-
Archaeolacerta group by Darevsky (1967).
The early Miocene was about the time of
the formation of the Caucasian Mountains
(Bogachev 1938).
The warm subtropical climate and
vegetation in the Caucasus favored the
evolution and dispersal of heat and
mesophilic forms (Triturus vittatus
ophryticus, T. vulgaris lantzi, Pelodytes
caucasicus, Bufo verrucosissimus, Lacerta
saxicola darevskii, L. s. brauneri, L.
derjugini, Elaphe longissima, Natrix
megalocephala, and Vipera kaznakowi ), as
well as species with a broader ecological
tolerance (Rana macrocnemis, Hyla arborea
schelkownikowi, Lacerta rudis, and L.
agilis grusinica ).
Fossil remains of mammals
(Mesocricetus, Prometheomys, Sorex,
Talpa ) [Vereschagin 1958] and insects
(Orthoptera, Hemiptera, Blattoidea, and
Vol. 3, p. 78
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 9. Lacerta saxicola darevskii. This lizard is a Colchis endemic whose distribution is restricted to the
northwestern part of the Colchis.
Coleoptera) [Rodendorf 1939] suggest a
good food supply for amphibians and
reptiles during the Miocene. It was also in
the Miocene that the majority of these
species reached the eastern-most parts of
the Greater Caucasian Range along its
southern slopes and penetrated from there
into the Talysh across the so-called
"Karabakhi Bridge". Safarov (1966), and
other scientists, have studied the former
direct relations between the Colchis and the
Hirkan floras. Even at the present time, the
floristic composition of the Kakhetinskij
region and of the Karabakh has many
common features with that of the Colchis
and the Talysh forests (Arushanyan 1973;
Sokolov 1977; Takhtadzhan 1978;
Gadzhiyev et al. 1985).
The end of the Tertiary period was
characterized by damping of tectonics due
to the broad correlation of the Caucasus and
the Balkans (Vereschagin 1958) and the
formation of the steppe landscapes along
the northern Black Sea coast (Pidoplichko
1954; Scherbak 1966). During that period,
such South-European species as Rana
ridibunda, Bufo viridis, Emys orbicularis,
Anguis fragilis, Coluber jugularis, and
Coronella austriaca seem to have
penetrated to the Precaucasia from the west.
At the same time, such species as Testudo
graeca, Pseudopus apodus, Triturus
cristatus karelini, Lacerta praticola pontica,
L. media, Coluber najadum, and Natrix
tessellata got into the Colchis from the
west along the Black Sea coast.
Early and Middle Pliocene should be
considered the beginning of initial
fragmentation of the Colchis faunal areas
when the Greater and the Lesser Caucasian
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 79
FIG. 10. The main refugia of the endemic Colchis herpetofauna.
Mountain ranges underwent substantial
glaciation (Grozdetskiy 1954; Markov et al.
1965). The main center of dispersal of
these species was the Colchis, where
relatively heat-loving vegetation of the
Caucasian type survived even during the
periods of the extreme Pleistocene cooling
(Vereschagin 1958; Adamyants 1971).
Along with the Colchis, smaller refugia
sporadically survived on the territory of the
Caucasus Black Sea coast, and also on the
northern slope of the Main Caucasian
Range between the Pshekha River and the
Small Laba River. The present distribution
of the Tertiary vegetation of the Colchis
type in the western Caucasus testifies to
this (Kharadze 1974; Pechorin and
Lozovoy 1980; Kholyavko et al. 1978;
Adamyants 1971; Koval and Litvinskaya
1986).
It was in the narrow humid gorges with
a relatively constant thermal regimen that
the representatives of the Colchis group
remained intact. At the same time,
independent populations might also have
been preserved in mid-mountain areas
where refugia of the Colchis vegetation
exist in the vicinities of the Fisht-Oshtenskij
Mountain Massive, the Lagonaki Plateau
and even in the Central Caucasus
(Kholyavko et al. 1978; Kharadze 1974).
Small refugia seem to have also remained
on the southern slope of the eastern pan of
the Greater Caucasus and in the Kuru River
Gorge. It is indisputable that the majority
of the mountainous populations of Colchis
species perished during the Pleistocene and
Vol. 3, p. 80
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
that the ones that survived in refugia have
been accumulating unique characteristics
which led to different geographical forms
(subspecies) on different slopes of the Main
and the Adzharo-Imeretinskij mountain
ranges. The data presented by Takhtadzhan
(1946) and Maruashvili (1956) support the
hypothesis concerning the preservation of
relict Colchis species in the mountains.
According to their data, the average annual
temperature during the glacial periods
decreased not more than 1.5-2.0°C, while
precipitation amounted to not less than
1500-2000 mm.
Darevsky (1967) considers that this
argument supports the possibility of foothill
refugia of reptiles existing on the sea facing
slopes of the Gagrinskij and the Bzhybskij
mountain ranges, and in other regions,
despite radical reorganization of the
distributions of all the species of plants and
animals in connection with glaciation.
During the interglacial and especially the
postglacial periods, reconstruction of all
vegetation belts took place (Vereschagin
1958). This favored the isolation of the
species of the Colchis and the Caucasian
groups in the above-mentioned refugia, but
favored wider dispersal of the European
and the Mediterranean groups in
Transcaucasia. In the northwestern part of
the Caucasus Black Sea coast, mesophilic
vegetation gave way to xerophytic
vegetation of the Mediterranean type. Plant
formations of this type with the prevalence
of Juniperetum, Querceto, Pinetum
carpinulosum, Pinetum fruticosum and
shibliaks are characteristic of the Anpa-
Gelendzhik region. Enclaves of
Mediterranean vegetation remained still
further to the south, up to Pitsunda
(Takhtadzhan 1978; Kolakovskiy 1961).
When the xerothermic period ended, the
climate became more humid again. This
favored the reestablishment of the former
borders of the forest belt (Vereschagin
1958). Subalpine meadows and elfin
woodlands were expanding throughout the
whole subalpine belt of the southern slope
of the Main Caucasian Mountain Range
from the Central Caucasus to the Fisht-
Oshtenskij Mountain Massive (Kholyavko
et al. 1978; Kharadze 1974; Dolukhanov
1974; Galushko 1974). On the northern
slope such vegetation is present in the
western parts and changes its character to
the east, transforming into a steppe type
(Lavrenko 1980). Modern areas of Vipera
dinniki and Lacerta caucasica alpina have
fixed distributional limits in the subalpine
belt influenced by the warm Black Sea.
Final settling of the present-day climate
favored fixation of the Colchis species
distributions, with their distinct populations
exceeding the bounds of the refugia. This
was coupled by simultaneous depression
and reduction of the European and
especially of the Mediterranean species
distributions.
Concluding this review of the Colchis
herpetofauna and their main refugia, it is
necessary to enumerate the most important
characteristics. The Colchis species are
characterized by antiquity (conservation
since the Tertiary period), Autochthonity,
depression — for some species {Vipera
kaznakowi; Lacerta clarcorum, L. a.
grusinica), existence of the northern-
Colchis limestone, and the southern-
Colchis volcanic centers of formation of
narrow-endemic forms. Reptiles have a
common tendency toward melanism, while
amphibians approach their low temperature
thresholds. These are the adaptive features
acquired during the glacial period. As a
rule, the modem distribution of the Colchis
species does not exceed the bounds of the
Colchis vegetation refugia or their
derivatives.
The maximal vertical distribution is in
the center of the Colchis up to 1800 m
above sea level, while in the other portions
of the refugia it does not exceed 1000 m
above sea level as a rule. The existence of
four refugia of the Colchis herpetofauna in
the Caucasian Isthmus is determined by
natural factors of high order- these are the
areas with slightly changed climatic
conditions characterized by modern
crossing of the January -3°C isotherm and
800 mm isohyet.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 81
Literature Cited
ADAMYANTS, G. I.. 1971. [On Castanetum of
the Caucasus]. A Report of the Sochi
Department at the USSR Geographical Society.
Issue 2. Leningrad. (In Russian).
ADZINBA, Z. I. 1980. [The plants of Abkhazia
from limited area]. Proceedings of the Botanical
Gardens. Sukhumi, Tbilisi, Georgia Issue
26:69-82. (In Russian).
ALBOV, N. M. 1885. [Papers on the flora of
Kolkhida]. Proceedings of the Tiflis Botanical
Gardens. Tiflis, Georgia Issue 1:1-288. (In
Russian).
ARUSHANYAN, R. I. 1973. [The relicts of
Nagomy Karabakh and their new findings].
Botanical Journal Leningrad 58(5):700-706. (In
Russian).
BAKRADZE, M. A. AND V. M. CHKHIVADZE
1977. [Fossils of the tortoises from Testudo
genus in the USSR]. Prosveschenye
Publishing House, Moscow. 369pp. (In
Russian).
BANNIKOV, A. G., I. S. DAREVESKY, V. G.
ISCHENKO, A. K. RUSTAMOV, AND N. N.
SCHERBAK. 1977. [Field guide of the USSR
amphibians and reptiles]. Prosveschenye
Publishing House, Moscow. 369pp. (In
Russian).
BARTENEV, A. AND M. REZNIKOVA. 1931.
NEE LAC ERT A -Formen (Reptilia) aus dem
Kaukasichen Staatsnaturschtzgebiete
(Westkaukasus). Zoologischer Anzeiger 96(9-
10):268-271.
BARTENEV, A. AND M. REZNIKOVA. 1935.
[Papers on the fauna of amphibians and reptiles
from the western and central parts of the State
Caucasus Reserve]. Bulletin of the Museum of
Georgia 8:1 1-41. (In Russian).
BISCHOFF, W. 1982. Zur Kenntnis der
innerartlichen Gliederung der Artwiner Eicechse,
Lacerta derjugini Nikolskij, 1898. Zool. Abh.
Bd. 38, Nr. 1 S. 1-51.
BISCHOFF, W. 1984. Bemerkungen zur
innerartlichen Gliederung und zur Verbreitung
der Artwiner Eidechse (Lacerta derjugini
Nikolskij, 1989) an den Sudhangen des GroBen
Kaukasus. Salamandra, Bd. 20, Nr. 2/3, S.
101-111.
BOGACHEV, V. V. 1938. [On the zoogeography
of the Caucasus and its geological history].
Materials of the Azerbajzhan Affiliation. The
USSR Academy of Sciences, Moscow. 4:29-
47. (In Russian).
BRAUNER.A. 1905. [Preliminary data on reptiles
and amphibians from the Crimea Kubanskaya
region, Volynskaya and Varshavskaya
gubernias]. Notes of the Novorossiskoye
Society of Researchers. Odessa, Russia. 28:1-
88. (In Russian).
CHKHIKVADZE, V. M. 1981. [Survey on the data
of amphibian and reptile neogene fossils from
the northern area adjacent to the Black Sea
coast]. Science Publishing, Leningrad, pp. 151-
152. (In Russian.)
CHKHIKVADZE, V. M. 1983. [Fossil turtles of the
Caucasus and northern territory adjacent to the
Black Sea coast]. Metsniyereba Press, Tbilisi,
Georgia 48 pp. (In Russian).
CHKHIKVADZE, V. M. 1984. [Survey on the
fossils of tailed and tailless amphibians of the
USSR]. Academic Press, Georgian Academy of
Sciences, Tbilisi 10(1):5-13. (In Russian).
DAREVSKY, I. S. 1957. [The fauna of the
Armenian reptiles and their zoogeographical
analysis]. Ph. D. Thesis. Yerevan, Armenia.
28 pp. (In Russian).
DAREVSKIY I. S. 1967. [Rock lizards from the
Caucasus (Lacerta saxicola).} Science
Publishing House, Leningrad. 210 pp. (In
Russian).
DAREVSKY, I. S. AND V. I. VEDMEDERJA. 1977.
[A new species form of the Lacerta saxicola
group from southeastern Turkey and adjacent
areas of Adzharia]. Proceedings of the
Zoological Institute, USSR Academy of
Sciences, Leningrad 74:50-54. (In Russian).
DERJUGIN, K. M. 1899. [Report on a field trip
and zoological research in Charivski territory,
southwestern Transcaucasia and the vicinity of
Trapezond]. Proceedings of Saint Petersburg
Society of Researchers, St. Petersburg 30(2): 1-
65. (In Russian).
DOLUKHANOV, A. G. 1974. [Subalpic landscapes
of the Caucasus as shelters for relict fauna
elements]. Problems of Botanies, Leningrad
12:27-34. (In Russian).
Vol. 3, p. 82
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
GADZHIYEV, V. D., A. M. ALEKPEROV, M. R.
EFENDIJEV, AND R. K. MUSTAFAJEVA. 1985.
[The Zakatalski Reserve]. Agroprom Press,
Moscow. 184 pp. (In Russian).
GALUSHKO, A. I. 1974. [Relicts of the highland
flora of the western part of the Central
Caucasus]. Pp. 19-26. In Problems of
Botanies, Vol. 12, Flora of Highlands and its
Exploration. Science Publishing Leningrad.
(In Russian).
GOLUBEV, N. S. 1980. [On the habitat of
Pelodytes caucasicus (Amphibia, Pelobatidae)].
Zoological News, Kiev, Ukraine (3):52-55. (In
Russian).
KOVAL, I. P. AND S. A. LITVINSKAYA. 1986.
[Rare vegetation communities on the Krasnodar
territory]. Rostov State University Press,
Rostov-upon-Don, USSR, part 3, 336 pp. (In
Russian).
KUZNETSOV, N. I. 1891. [Elements of the
Mediterranean area in Western Transcaucasia].
Notes of the Russian Geographical Society, St.
Petersberg 23(3): 1-190. (In Russian).
LAVRENKO, Y. M. 1980. [Caucasus montane and
meadow steppes and stepped meadows]. Pp.
269-272. In Vegetation of the European part of
the USSR, Science Publishing, Leningrad. (In
Russian).
GOLUBEV, N. S. 1985. [Caucasus land toad,
Pelodytes caucasicus Boulenger (distribution,
morphology and ecology)]. Ph.D. Thesis.
Leningrad. 25 pp. (In Russian).
GROZDETSKIY, N. A. 1954. [Physical geography
of the Caucasus]. Moscow State University
Press, Moscow 2(1): 1-208. (In Russian).
GROZDETSKIY, N. A. 1958. [Physical geography
of the Caucasus]. Moscow State University
Press, Moscow 2:(2)l-264. (In Russian).
GUUSASHVILI, V. Z., L. B. MAHATADZE, AND
L. I. PRILIPKO. 1975. [Vegetation of the
Caucasus]. Science Publishing House,
Moscow. 223 pp. (In Russian.)
KHARADZE, A. L. 1974. [On some floragenetic
endemic groups in the Big Caucasus].
Problems of Botanies, Science Publishing
House, Leningrad 12:70-76. (In Russian).
KHOLYAVKO, V. S., D. A. GLOBA-
MIKHAILENKO, AND E. S. KHOLYAVKO
1978. [The tree atlas of the Caucasus].
Moscow. 215 pp. (In Russian).
KHOZATSKY, L. I. 1941. [Sea storms and some
land living animals]. Wildlife, Moscow 1:112-
113. (In Russian).
KOLAKOVSKIY, A. A. 1961. [Vegetation of
Kolkhida]. Materials on the USSR fauna and
flora. MOIP Press, Moscow, Issue 10. 460 pp.
(in Russian).
KOLAKOVSKIY, A. A. 1980. [The flora of
Abkhazia]. Metsniyereba Publishing, Tbilisi,
Georgia 1:7-18. (In Russian).
LUKINA, G. P. 1965. [On the taxonomy of the
legless lizard]. Herpetology, Tashkent,
Uzbekistan, USSR, pp. 6-10. (In Russian).
MALEYEV, V. P. 1941. [Tertiary relicts in the
flora of the Western Caucasus and major stages
of the Quaternary history of its USSR flora].
The USSR Academy of Sciences Press,
Moscow, pp. 61-144. (In Russian.)
MARKOV, K. K., G. I. LAZUKOV, AND V. A.
NIKOLAYEV. 1965. [The Caucasus]. Pp. 306-
321. In Quaternary Period, v. 1, Territory of
the USSR, part 2. Area of Ancient Glaciation
of High Mountains of the USSR South, chapter
2, Moscow University Press, Moscow. (In
Russian).
MARUASHVILI, L. I. 1956. [The reason to review
the present day concepts about
paleogeographical conditions of the glacier
period in the Caucasus]. Press of the Institute
of Geography named after Vakhushti, Tibilisi,
Georgia. 113 pp. (In Russian.)
MILYANORSKIY, Y. S. 1957. [On the snake
fauna of Abkhazia]. Proceedings of the
Abkhazski State Museum, Georgia 2:199-203.
(In Russian).
NEGMEDZYANOV, V. A. AND M. A. BAKRADZE.
1977. [On the herpetology of Kolkhida]. Pp.
153-155. In Questions of Herpetology,
Leningrad. (In Russian).
NESTEROV, P. V. 1911. [Materials on the
herpetology of the southwestern Transcaucasia
(Chokhotski Territory)]. Annual Journal of the
Zoological Museum, Academy of Sciences, St.
Petersburg 10(1): 1-18. (In Russian).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 83
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1911. [Reptiles and
amphibians of the Caucasus]. The Caucasus
Museum Press, Tiflis, Georgia 10(1): 1-18. (In
Russian.)
NORDMANN, A. 1840. Cataloque raisonne des
mammiferes de la faune Pontique. Voyage dans
la Russia meridionale et la Crimec, par la
Hongric, la Valachie et la Moldavic, vol. 3, s.
535-551.
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUN1YEV. 1986a.
[Present ranges, possible ways of their
formation and phylogeny of the three species of
vipers from the Eurosiberic gTOup (V .
kaznakowi complex) in the Caucasus].
Proceedings of the Zoological Institute, USSR
Academy of Sciences, Leningrad 157:104-135.
(In Russian).
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUNIYEV. 1986b. [A
new species of the grass snake Natrix
megalocephala sp. nov from the Caucasus]. Pp.
116-130. In Proceedings of the Zoological
Institute, Leningrad, Vol. 12. Leningrad. (In
Russian).
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUNIYEV. 1990. Three
species in the Vipera kaznakowi complex
(Eurosiberian Group) in the Caucasus: their
present distribution, possible genesis, and
phylogeny. Asiatic Herpetological Research
3:1-36.
ORLOVA, V. F. 1973. [Herpetofauna of the
northern area of the State Caucasus Reserve].
Zoological News, Kiev, Ukraine 2:61-65. (In
Russian).
ORLOVA, V. F. 1978a. [Geographical variation
and lektotype description of Lacerta derjugini
Nikolski]. Pp. 188-203. In Birds and
Reptiles. Moscow State University Press,
Moscow. (In Russian).
ORLOVA, V. F. 1978b. [Geographical
distribution and intraspecific variation of Lacerta
praticola from the Caucasus. Pp. 204-215. In
Birds and Reptiles. Moscow State University
Press, Moscow. (In Russian).
PAVLOV, N. B. 1984. Botanic geography of the
USSR, Moscow, pp.13-17. (In Russian).
PESHORIN, A. I. AND S. P. LOZOVOY. 1980.
[Natural monuments of the Krasnodar Territory].
Krasnodar Press, Krasnodar. 138 pp. (In
Russian).
PETERS, G. 1960. Die Grusinische Zauneidechse
Lacerta agilis grusinica nomen novum. Zool.
Anz. Bd. 165, Nr. 7/8, S. 113-126.
PIDOPLICHKO, I. G. 1954. [On the glacier
period]. The Ukraine Academy of Sciences
Press, Kiev, Ukraine. 264 pp. (In Russian).
RODENDORF, B. B. 1939. [On the Miocene fauna
of insects in the vicinity of Voroshilovsk].
Priroda Publishing, Moscow, N. 12. (In
Russian).
SAFAROV, I. V. 1966. [Dzelkva, its biological
and ecological peculiarities and industrial
significance]. Academic News, Azerbajzhan
1:15-17. (In Russian).
SATUNIN, K. A. 1912. [On zoogeographical
circles of the Caucasus Territory]. The
Caucasus Museum News, Tiflis, Georgia
7:(1)1-106. On Russian).
SCHERBAK, N. N. 1966. [Amphibians and
reptiles of the Crimea]. Naukova Dumka
Publishing House, Kiev, Ukraine. 239 pp. (In
Russian).
SCHERBAK, N. N. 1981. [Fundamentals of
herpetogeographic regional divisions of the
USSR territory]. Pp. 157-158 In Questions
of Herpetology, Leningrad. (In Russian).
SCHERBAK, N. N. AND SCHERBAN. 1980.
[Amphibians and reptiles of the Ukrainian
Karpat Mountains]. Naukova Dumka
Publishing House, Kiev, Ukraine. 253 pp. (In
Russian).
SILANTYEV, A. 1903. [Materials on the
herpetology of the Black Sea region]. Annual
journal of the Zoological Museum, Academy of
Sciences, St. Petersbourg 8:1-10. (In Russian).
SINSKAYA, Y. N. 1933. [Major evolutional
characters of the forest vegetation in the
Caucasus with regard to the specific history].
Botanical loumal, Leningrad 18(5-6): 117- 130.
(In Russian).
SOKOLOV, S. Y. 1977. [The habitats of trees and
bushes of the USSR]. Science Publishing
House, Leningrad 1:1-163. (In Russian).
TAKHTADZHAN. 1946. [On the history of the
vegetation developments in Armenia].
Proceedings of the Botanic Institute, Armenian
Academy of Sciences, Yerevan, Armenia 4:51-
Vol. 3, p. 84
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
107. (In Russian).
TAKHTADZHAN. 1978. [Floristic areas of land].
Science Publishing, Leningrad. 219 pp. (In
Russian).
VEDMEDERJA, V. I., N. L. ORLOV AND B. S.
TUNIYEV. 1986. [On the taxonomy of three
viper species of the Vipera kaznakowi
complex]. Proceedings of the Zoological
Institute, Leningrad 157:55-61. (In Russian).
TUNIYEV, B. S. 1983. [The herpetofauna of the
southern part of the Caucasus State Reserve].
Pp. 84-94. In Conservation of the Relict Flora
and Fauna in the Northwestern Caucasus.
Leningrad. (In Russian).
TUNIYEV, B. S. 1985. [Rare and endangered
amphibians and reptiles of the Caucasus
Reserve]. Pp. 104-116. In Ecological
Researches in the Caucasus Biospheric Reserve.
Rostov State University Press, Rostov-upon-
Don. (In Russian).
TUNIYEV, B. S. AND S. Y. BEREGOVAYA 1986.
[Sympatric amphibians of yew-box groves].
Proceedings of the Zoological Institute, USSR
Academy of Sciences, Leningrad 157:136-151.
(In Russian).
VEKUA, A. K., K. S. KALANDADZE, AND V. M.
CHIKVADZE. 1979. [New paleontological
findings from Belaya (White) Cave, Georgia,
USSR]. Reports of the Georgian Academy of
Sciences, Tbilisi, Georgia. 96(3):745-748. (In
Russian).
VERESCHAGIN, N. K. 1958. [Genesis of the
terrain fauna of the Caucasus Isthmus]. Pp.
506-514. In Fauna of the USSR, Vol. 5.
Montane Areas of the European Part of the
USSR, Academic Press, Moscow. (In
Russian).
YEFIMOV, M. B., AND V. M. CHKHIVADZE.
1987. [Survey on crocodile fossils in the
USSR]. Georgian Academy of Science News,
Tbilisi, Georgia 13(3):200-206. (In Russian).
TUROV, S. S. 1928. [Materials on the fauna of
the State Caucasus Reserve]. Works of the
North Caucasus Research Institutions
Association, Rostov-upon-Don 2:1-15. (In
Russian).
ZEROVA, G. A. AND V. M. CHKHIVADZE. 1984.
[Survey on cenozoic lizards and snakes from the
USSR]. Georgian Academy of Sciences News,
Tbilisi, Georgia 10(5):319-325. (In Russian).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 85-100
Studies of the Early Embryonic Development of Rana rugulosa Wiegmann
jionghuaPan1 and Danyu Liang1
^Department of Biology, South China Normal University, Guangzhou, Guandong, China
Abstract. -This paper deals with the early embryonic developmental stages of Rana rugulosa
Wiegmann, and with methods of artificial fertilization and experimentally accelerated development.
Developmental stages are distinguished by morphological changes and obvious physiological features. At a
temperature of 25.1 to 27°C it takes 70 hr 20 min to complete development from fertilized eggs to tadpoles
with opercular folds. This course of development is divided into 25 stages, which are standardized with
normal table equivalents.
Key Words: Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae, Rana rugulosa, embryonic development, artificial fertilization,
accelerated development, fertilized eggs, normal table.
Introduction
Rana rugulosa Wiegmann, whose
popular name is the Field Chicken in
China, is strong and big of body. It is
famous for its delicacy of meat and the
price is dear. Domestic and foreign
markets are in great need of it. The growth
and development of these frogs are
relatively quick. Hatchlings can become
sexually mature in one year. The average
body length is about 1 10 mm. The weight
is about 0.25 kg. Consequently, Rana
rugulosa farming has been a growing
enterprise. More papers deal with the
embryonic development of R. guentheri
Boulonger and R. catesbeiana. Currently
there are few domestic and foreign studies
on the embryonic development of R .
rugulosa. In order to produce reference
material for the captive breeding of this
frog, we studied its early embryonic
development, using artificial fertilization
and higher temperatures to accelerate
development experimentally, during the
months of April and June, 1987 and 1988.
Methods
We made 1 1 observations on the
embryonic development of Rana rugulosa.
Six of the 11 were artificially fertilized.
The parent frogs were bought in
Guangzhou. The description of the
features of embryonic development was
mainly based on the six artificially fertilized
eggs. The water temperature of the six
developing embryos was 25.1 to 27°C; the
pH was 6.5-6.8. Several minutes after
oviposition and ejaculation or artificial
fertilization, we put the oocyte into the
laboratory. Then we used a microscope to
observe the course of development and to
measure the size and shape. The
developmental stages were defined as
beginning when half of the embryos in a
sample showed all of the distinguishing
characters of that stage.
For every developmental stage we took
10 to 20 embryos and fixed them in 5%
formalin and Bouin's fluid. This material
was used in drawings, tissue-slices, and
photomicrographs. The figures shown
here were taken from observations of living
material.
Results
The 25 stages of the early embryonic of
Rana tigrina are as follows (time in
parentheses is hours and minutes after
fertilization):
I) Oocyte stage. Unfertilized eggs are
spheres 1.4-1.7 mm in diameter (Fig. 26).
(00:25-00:30): The egg membrane absorbs
water and expands. The eggs reach 2.6-
4.0 mm in perivitellic space. (00:50): The
pigment crown of the animal pole extends
downward upon the gray crescent
(Fig. la, lb, lc, Id, le, 26).
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 86
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
2) 2 cell stage. (01:12): The first
longitudinal cleavage progresses and a
cleavage furrow in the animal pole appears,
forming 2 equal hemispheres (Fig. 2a, 2b,
27).
3) 4 cell stage. (01:33): A cleavage
furrow in the animal pole appears,
perpendicular to the first cleavage furrow.
It progresses to the vegetal pole and forms
four equal sections (Fig. 3a, 3b, 28).
4) 8 cell stage. (01:42): The third
cleavage furrow appears parallel to the
equator, approximately bisecting the animal
hemisphere, forming four small animal
cells and four large vegetal cells (Fig. 4a,
4b, 29).
5) 16 cell stage. (01:48): Observed from
the animal pole, the fourth cleavage forms
eight blastomeres in two circular or
elliptical tiers (Fig. 5a, 5b, 30).
6) 32 cell stage. (02:05): The fifth
cleavage is horizontal. The animal pole has
eight small cells; the vegetal pole has 8
large cells (Fig. 6a, 6b, 31).
7) Early blastula stage. (02:23): The
embryo is at the large cell blastula stage,
but the cells are still clearly distinguished.
The blastocoel begins to appear in the
middle part of the embryo near the animal
pole (Fig. 7a, 7b, 32).
8) Mid-blastula stage. (02:50): There are
many small blastomeres. The blastocoel
continues to amplify (Fig. 8a, 8b, 33).
9. Late blastula stage. (03:18): The
blastomeres are the color of a red bayberry.
The cell boundary becomes indistinct and
the blastocoel expands to its maximum
(Fig. 9a, 9b, 34)
10) Early gastrula stage. (05:56): The
pigmented crown epiboly of the animal cap
occurs, extending to cover over 75% of the
embryo. The dorsal lip forms. Involution
of cells begins (Fig. 10a, 10b, 35).
11) Mid-gastrula stage. (07:00): The
dorsal lip continues to amplify. The cells
on the side of the lip are drawn into the
future archenteron and a semicircle appears
(Fig. 11a, lib, 36).
12) Late gastrula stage. (08:05): The
blastopore shrinks and closes gradually.
Eventually, the yolk plug is enclosed in the
embryo (Fig. 12a, 12b, 12c, 12d, 37)
13) Neural plate stage. (10:30): The
blastopore becomes a fissure, and the
embryo begins to elongate along the
longitudinal axis, becoming pear-shaped
(Fig. 13a,.13b, 38).
14) Neural fold stage stage. (11 :50): A
fold appears on both sides of the neural
plate. The neural groove forms the median
sinus of the embryo. The front of the plate
is bigger, and the neural fold gradually
approaches the dorsal axis from both sides.
The embryo elongates to 1.9 mm (Fig. 14a,
14b, 39).
15) Cilial movement stage. (12:40): The
neural folds are joining. The embryo
rotates within the vitelline membrane (Fig.
15a, 15b, 40).
16) Nerve tube stage. (13:45): The neural
tube has formed and the gill plate and the
cement gland can be seen (Fig. 16a, 16b,
41).
17) Tail bud stage. (14:55): Two outer
gill buds protrude on the side of each gill
plate. The total length is 3.0-3.6 mm, and
the length of the tail bud is 1/10 to 1/7 of
this (Fig. 17a, 17b, 17c, 42).
18) Muscle effect stage. (15:55):
Muscular response begins in most
individuals. The olfactory organ appears,
the cement gland is complete. Total length
is 3.3-3.8 mm., and the length of the tail
bud is W of this (Fig. 18a, 18b, 18c, 43).
19) Hatching stage. (16:45): The embryo
hatches from the egg membrane and two
outer gill budlets with 3-5 branches
protrude obviously (Fig. 19a, 19b, 19c,
19d, 44).
20) Heart beat stage. (29:25): The heart
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 87
begins to move, the eyes protrude , the pair
of otoliths can be seen, and the 3rd external
gill matures (Fig. 20a, 20b, 20c, 45).
21) Open mouth stage. (31:10): The
membrane covering the mouth splits to
show the mouth cavity. The alimentary
canal is complete and body segments are
obvious. The inverted "V" shape
myomeres appear on the side of the
embryo. Body length is 5.8-6.2 mm. Tail
fin length is half of the body length (Fig.
21a, 21b, 21c, 46).
22) Tail fin blood circulatory stage.
(32:00): The cement gland begins to
degrade, circulation begins in the tail bud,
and tadpoles are able to swim in a straight
line (Fig. 22a, 22b, 22c, 47).
23) Gill opercular fold stage. (35:55):
The opercular fold appears in the base of
the external gill and the intestines form a
bow (Fig. 23a, 23b, 23c, 48).
24) Right side operculum closed stage.
(55:30): The opercular fold stretches
toward the right side, the right external gill
is covered and forms the right internal gill.
The left external gill is exposed. The
intestines have 2-3 twists. Total length is
6-9 mm (Fig. 24a, 24b, 24c, 49).
25) Operculum completion stage. (70:20):
The external gill in entirely enclosed in the
gill cavity, the posterior of which has an
exhalent pore to the left side. The yolk has
almost been absorbed, and the tadpoles
begin feeding. Total length is 6.8-10.5 mm
(Fig. 25a, 25b, 25c).
Table 1 shows N & F normal table
equivalents (Nieuwkoop and Faber 1967)
of our results.
Discussion
1. The circumstances of the early
embryonic development of Rana tigrina, R.
catesbeiana, R. Umnochiris, and R.
nigromaculata basically identical, but R.
rugulosa has some minor differences in
developmental timing.
TABLE 1. Normal table equivalents
(Nieuwkoop and Faber 1967) of the
developmental stages of Rana rugulosa as listed
in this paper.
2. During early embryonic
development, we raised Rana rugulosa in
water of about 25.1 to 27.1°C. It takes
only 70 hr, 20 min to develop from oocyte
to gill cover stage. Under the same
conditions, R. catesbeiana is 60 to 70 hr
slower, and R. Umnochiris is 80 hr
slower. Speed of development is closely
related to temperature. At 26 to 28.5°C this
developmental period in R. rugulosa takes
only 64 hr, 30 min.
Vol. 3, p. 88
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
3. Fifty-five minutes after fertilization,
the grey crescent of Rana rugulosa
appears. This is identical to the timing of
R. catesbeiana, but different from that of R.
nigromaculata, in which the grey crescent
can barely be seen, or is not visible.
4. The development of Rana rugulosa
from the eight cell stage to the 16 cell stage
takes six min, while the same period takes
59 min in R. catesbeiana.
5. In Rana rugulosa, external gill
develops 3-5 branches during the period of
hatching, while in R. catesbeiana, the
external gill develops 2-3 branches during
the tail bud circulatory stage. The third
external gill appears sooner in R. rugulosa
than in R. catesbeiana or R. guentheri.
6. Eggs laid by Rana rugulosa adhere
in a pile or on the surface of the water. A
reason for low hatching success is that
oxygen levels can be low in the center of
the egg mass. According to our
observations, eggs at the edge of a mass are
easy to hatch. If we separate the masses
early enough, adequate dispersion can be
achieved. However, the operation must be
a careful one, or the egg membranes will be
broken and the proper development of the
embryo can be affected, causing deformity
and death.
References
CAI, M. 1980. [Hasten parturition and artificial
fertilize method of frogs]. Chinese Journal of
Zoology, Beijing. 2:49-50. (In Chinese).
CHENGDU INSTITUTE OF BIOLOGY 1977. [Key
to Amphibians of China]. Science Press,
Beijing, China. 93 pp. (In Chinese).
GU, S. AND J. LE. 1986. [Animal Embryology].
People's Education Press, Beijing, China. (In
Chinese).
LIU, C. AND S. HU. 1961. [The Tailless
Salientia in China]. Science Press, Beijing,
China. 364 pp. (In Chinese).
NIEUWKOOP, P. D. AND J. FABER. 1967.
Normal table oiXenopus laevis. North Holland
Publishing Co. Amsterdam.
SHANDONG FISHERIES INSTITUTE. 1966. [The
embryonic development of Rana catesbeiana.]
Chinese Journal of Zoology 1966(4): 182-185.
(In Chinese).
ZHANG, J., J. LIU, AND M. CAI. 1985. [A study
on the seasonal variation in the ovary and the
reproductive frequency in Rana limnochiris].
Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(4):276-281.
(In Chinese).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 89
Fig. 1 A
I m m
H Fig. 1 B
Fig. ID I m m Fig. 1 E
» 1
Fig. 2 A
Fig. 2 B
Fig. 3 A
Fig. 3 B
FIG. la, lb, lc, Id, le, 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b. Embryonic development of R ana rugulosa. See text for
details.
Vol. 3, p. 90
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Fig. 4 A
Fig. 4 B
Fig. 5 A
l 1
Fig. 5 B
Fig. 6 A
Fig. 6 B
Fig. 7 A
Fig. 7 B
Fig. 8 A
FIG. 4a, 4b, 5a, 5b, 6a, 6b, 7a, 7b, 8a. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See text for
details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 91
Fig. 8 B
Fig. 9 A
Fig. 9 B
I m m
Fig. 10 A
Fig. 10 B
Fig. 1 1 A
Fig. 1 1 B
Fig. 12 A
Fig. 12 B
FIG. 8b, 9a, 9b, 10a, 10b, 11a, lib, 12a, 12b. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See
text for details.
Vol. 3, p. 92
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Fig. 12 C
Fig. 12 D
I m m
H 1
Fig. 13 A
Fig. 13 B
Fig. 14 A
Fig. 14 B
FIG. 12c, 12d, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See text for details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 93
Fig. 15 A
I m m
I 1
Fig. 15 B
Fig. 16 A
Fig. 16 B
Fig. 17 A
Fig. 17 B
I m m
i <
Fig. 17 C
FIG. 15a, 15b, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, 17c. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See text for
details.
Vol. 3, p. 94
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Fig. 18 B
Fig. 18 C
2mm
Fig. 19 A i 1 Fig. 19 B
Fig. 19 C
m m
Fig. 19 D
Fig. 20 A
Fig. 20 B
Fig. 20 C
FIG. 18a, 18b, 18c, 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, 20a, 20b, 20c. Embryonic development of Rana
rugulosa. See text for details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 95
Fig. 21 B
Fig. 21 A
m m
Fig. 21 C
Fig. 22 A
Fig. 22 B
Fig. 22 C
Fig. 23 B
Fig. 23 C
FIG. 21a, 21b, 21c, 22a, 22b, 22c, 23a, 23b, 23c. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa.
See text for details.
Vol. 3, p. 96
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Fig. 24 A
Fig. 24 B
2mm
i «
Fig. 24 C
Fig. 25 A
Fig. 25 B
Fig. 25 C
FIG. 24a, 24b, 24c, 25a, 25b, 25c. Embryonic development of R ana rugulosa. See text for details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 97
FIG. 26 (X30)
FIG. 27 (X30)
FIG. 28 (X30)
FIG. 29 (X30)
FIG. 30 (X30)
FIG. 31 (X30)
FIG. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See text for details.
Vol. 3, p. 98
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 32 (X30)
FIG. 33 (X30)
FIG. 34 (X30)
FIG. 35 (X30)
FIG. 36 (X30)
FIG. 37 (X30)
FIG. 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37. Embryonic development of Rana rugulosa. See text for details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 99
FIG. 38 (X30)
FIG. 39 (X30)
FIG. 40 (X30)
FIG. 41 (X30)
FIG. 42 (X30)
FIG. 43 (X20)
FIG. 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43. Embryonic development oiRana rugulosa. See text for details.
Vol. 3, p. 100 Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 44 (X20)
FIG. 45 (X15)
FIG. 46 (X15)
FIG. 47 (X15)
FIG. 48 (X10)
FIG. 49 (X10)
FIG. 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49. Embryonic development oiRana rugulosa. See text for details.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 101-103
The Validity of Elaphe perlacea, a Rare Endemic Snake from
Sichuan Province, China
ermi Zhao1
^Chengdu Institute of Biology, P.O. Box 416, Academia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Key Words: Reptilia, Serpentes, Colubridae, Elaphe perlacea, China, Sichuan, endemic, taxonomic
validity.
Introduction
Recently Schulz (1989) reported on the
validity of the specific status of Elaphe
perlacea Stejneger, 1929. Schulz (1989)
concluded, "Since data appear to be chiefly
within the range of E. mandarina, E.
perlacea is supposed to be placed in a
subspecies rank of E. mandarina pointing
out that further investigations may reveal
that it is even a variety only." Elaphe
perlacea is an endemic to Sichuan Province,
China. For fifty years after the description
of Elaphe perlacea by Stejneger (1929) no
specimens were found. Many
herpetologists including those of China
doubted its validity.
In the last ten years three additional
specimens have been found in Sichuan
Province (Table 1, 2). Two of these
specimens (80-1, 87-2, and 88-3) were
examined by me. All three specimens have
a dorsal scale formula of 19-19-17, 7 upper
labials (the third and fourth entering the
eye), one preocular, two post oculars, 1+2
temporals, and a divided anal. Both the
scale counts and the patterns are similar to
those of the type. The new material differs
from that of the type in having: 1) Four
lower labials in contact with the anterior
chin shield; 2) Dorsal scales of the male
are smooth, only the posterior 2 to 3 middle
rows are slightly keeled; 3) slight
modification of the dorsal head pattern
(Fig. 1).
Elaphe perlacea differs from E.
mandarina (Cantor) in many ways. E.
mandarina has: 1) 23 scale rows on the
neck and mid-body, 19 or 21 before the
vent; 2) Two anterior temporal scales
(occasionally one); 3) A much different
dorsal pattern. Thus, Elaphe perlacea is a
valid species.
On a field trip during May of 1989 I
went to Hailuo Gou one of the new
localities. On the way we passed through a
small town, Moxi. In the market were
several Elaphe perlacea skins. This
suggests that this snake is common in this
area.
The type locality of Elaphe perlacea is
Yachow Prefecture (Ya'an Prefecture),
Sichuan Province, China. This is an
imprecise locality since a prefecture is quite
large. The two new localities are not in this
prefecture but are close to it. The new
TABLE 1. Elaphe perlacea specimens found in Sichuan recenUy.
Sex, Number Locality
Male
Male, 87-2
Female, 88-3
Female, 80-1
Hailuo Gou, Luding
Hailuo Gou, Luding
Hailuo Gou, Luding
Wolong, Wenchuan
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 102
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 2. Scale counts of Elaphe perlacea Stejneger, 1929.
a b c
FIG. 1. Back of head of Elaphe perlacea, showing the main pattern, a. Male, type specimen, b. Female
from Wolong. c. Male from Hailuo Gou.
FIG. 2. Map of Sichuan showing approximate position of localities.
April 1990 Chinese Herpetological Research Vol. 3, p. 103
localities are: Elev. 2000 and 2500 m, Literature Cited
Hailuo Gou, Luding County, Garze Zang
Autonomous Prefecture, and Elev. 2000 m, SCHULZ, K.-D. 1989. Die hinterasiatischen
Wolong, Wenchuan County, Aba (Ngawa) Kletternattern der Gattung Elaphe Teil XVI
Zang Autonomous Prefecture, Sichuan Elaphe perlacea Stejneger, 1929 Sauria, Berlin-
Province, China (Fig. 2). As presently W., 11(2):15-16.
understood Elaphe perlacea is endemic to
Sichuan Province, China, and only occurs Stejneger, L. 1929. A new snake from China,
in the foot hills of the Himalayan Plateau Proceedings of the Biological Society of
directly west of the Sichuan Basin. Wash.ngton 42:129-130.
[April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.3, pp. 104-115
Stellio sacra (Smith 1935)
a Distinct Species of Asiatic Rock Agamid
from Tibet*
NATALIA B. ANANJEVA1, GUNTHER PETERS2, J. ROBERT MACEY3
AND THEODORE J. PAPENFUSS3
^Zoological Institute, USSR Academy of Sciences, Leningrad, USSR
^Museum fur Naturkunde der Humboldt-Universitdt, Invalidenstrasse 43, Berlin, DDR
^Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California, USA
Abstract. -An examination of the type series of Agama himalayana sacra Smith (1935) and new
material collected in Tibet in 1988 has shown that this form should be considered a distinct species. In
following the recent revision of the genus Agama (Moody 1980), Stellio sacra is included in the genus
with all other Asiatic rock agamids.
Key Words: Reptilia, Sauria, Agamidae, Stellio sacra, Tibet, systematics, distribution.
Introduction
Four agamid lizards were collected at the
beginning of the 20th Century near Lhasa,
Tibet. They were described in a short
account by Smith (1935) as a subspecies of
the Himalayan rock agamid Agama
himalayana sacra.
The examination of these type specimens
and new material collected in Lhasa and the
vicinity of Lhasa, Tibet in 1988 by the third
and fourth authors, led us to the conclusion
that it is not a subspecies of Stellio
himalayanus. Furthermore it is not a
member of the Stellio himalayanus species
complex which includes Stellio
badakhshanus, Stellio chernovi, Stellio
himalayanus, and Stellio stoliczkanus. The
results of the examination of the agamids
from Lhasa, Tibet confirm the opinion of
Ananjeva et al. (1981) that Stellio sacra
should be elevated to full specific status.
According to the present revision of the
genus Agama (Wermuth 1967) into Agama,
Stellio (Moody 1980; Sokolovsky 1975,
1977) Trapelus, Psuedotrapelus, and
Xenagama (Moody 1980) the lizards
examined from Tibet should have the
generic name, Stellio.
* Sino-Soviet- American Arid Asian Desert Regions
Research Paper no. 5.
Methods
To the best of our knowledge all
specimens housed outside the Peoples
Republic of China were examined. Of the
four specimens in the type series, one
lectotype and two paralectotypes are housed
at the British Museum (Natural History)
[BMNH], and one paralectotype is housed
at the Indian Museum, Calcutta (Zoological
Survey of India [ZSI]). Thirteen additional
specimens were collected during the 1988
joint Chengdu Institute of Biology -
University of California Expedition and are
housed at the California Academy of
Sciences (CAS).
Stellio sacra
(Smith 1935), new combination
Known Material
Material Examined:
Lectotype: BMNH 1946.8.28.57
(formerly 1904.12.28.1) [Fig. 1.]
Locality: Near Lhasa, Tibet.
Paralectotypes: BMNH 1946.8. 28.58,
BMNH 1946.8.28.59 [Fig. 2], and ZSI
15740 [Fig. 3]. Locality: near Lhasa,
Tibet.
CAS 170545. Locality: Elev. 3740 m,
Sera Monastery, Lhasa (29° 39' N 91°
fr\ 1 fifin u.,
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 105
FIG. 1. Lectotype of Stellio sacra BMNH 1946.8.28.57 (formerly 1904.12.28.1).
Sera Monastery, Lhasa (29° 39' N 91°
06' E), Lhasa Municipality, Xizang (Tibet)
Autonomous Region, China. Collected by:
T. J. Papenfuss and R. Macey. Date: 24
Sept., 1988.
CAS 170546-53. Locality: Elev.
3700 m, at base of mountains approx. 3
km WNW (airline) of the Potala Palace,
Lhasa (29° 39' N 91° 06' E), Lhasa
Municipality, Xizang (Tibet) Autonomous
Region, China. Collected by: CAS
170546-49 R. Macey and T. J. Papenfuss,
and CAS 170550-53 T. J. Papenfuss and
R. Macey. Date: 25 Sept., 1988.
CAS 170554-57. Locality: Elev. 3990
m, 52.4 km south of Yangbajan (30° 13' N
90° 25' E), also at km 1900.8 from
Xining, on the Xining-Golmud-Lhasa Rd.,
Lhasa Municipality, Xizang (Tibet)
Autonomous Region, China. Collected by:
CAS 170554-55 R. Macey and T. J.
Papenfuss, CAS 170556-57 T. J.
Papenfuss and R. Macey. Date: 27 Sept.,
1988. (See Table 1).
Other Material.
Note that the following material is
reported on in Hu et al. (1987) but no
numbers or reference to a museum
collection are mentioned. It is probable that
all or most of these specimens are housed at
the Chengdu Institute of Biology.
Three males, 3 females, and 3 juveniles.
Locality: Bomi (29° 50' N 95° 45' E),
Qamdo Prefecture, Xizang (Tibet)
Autonomous Region, China.
Six males, and 12 females. Locality:
Lhasa (29° 39' N 91° 06' E), Lhasa
Municipality, Xizang (Tibet) Autonomous
Region, China.
Vol. 3, p. 106
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
FIG. 2. Paralectotypes oiStellio sacra BMNH 1946.8. 28.58 and BMNH 1946.8.28.59.
Two males, 2 females, and 1 juvenile.
Locality: Nyingchi (29° 32' N 94°
25' E), Lhasa Municipality, Xizang (Tibet)
Autonomous Region, China.
Distribution
Stellio sacra as presently understood, is
restricted to the river drainage of the
Yarlung Zangbo in the Lhasa Valley,
Xizang (Tibet) Autonomous Region, China
(Fig. 4). Only four localities are known,
all between 3000 and 4000 m.
Populations occurring in the Kunlun
Mountains of southern Xinjiang Uygur
Autonomous Region, China were
previously assigned to Stellio himalayanus
himalayanus, however their present
taxonomic position is uncertain.
Diagnosis: Rock agamid with flattened
head and body which is typical for this
lizard group. They are comparatively large
lizards with a snout-vent length of 120-
150 mm and a tail length of 180-240 mm
(Table 1).
Gular Sac seems to be developed to a
greater degree than in other Stellio. Body
scales are small and granular. The scales
are not well differentiated. There is a very
slight but noticeable nuchal crest on the
head. It begins from the middle of the
occiput and continues as a poorly
differentiated vertebral stripe. The
longitudinal rows of enlarged and feebly
keeled scales on the vertebral region are
arranged parallel to each other. There are
neither groups of enlarged scales nor
separate enlarged scales on the dorsal lateral
regions.
The males have a large patch of callous
scales on the belly. The annuli and
segmentation of the scales on the basal
quarter of the tail are not prominent. On the
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 107
\
/
FIG. 3. Paralectotype of Stellio sacra ZSI 15740.
lateral surface of the tail there are three to
four annuli in each segment.
There is a small granular dark pattern on
the back. The center of the back tends to
have more black and toward the sides a
dark golden brown dominates. The
separate elements of this pattern are
connected to heavily marked diffuse
transverse stripes. The narrow stripes form
two rows of the dark colored scales that
continue from the neck to the tail. Overall
the lizard is darkly colored but there are a
few randomly scattered yellow blotches on
the back (Fig. 5). Juveniles are lighter in
color tending more toward a dark golden
brown with darker speckling all over the
back. The dark golden brown forms bands
across the back which are offset at the
spine.
Comparative Description
Stellio sacra differs from Stellio
himalayanus and related forms in all the
diagnosis characters. Stellio sacra is only
similar in body size to Stellio stoliczkanus
among the species examined. Other species
are notably smaller (Table 1; Anderson and
Leviton 1969; Ananjeva et al. 1981).
The body proportion data concerning
Stellio sacra and the Stellio himalayanus
species complex indicates small differences
Vol. 3, p. 108
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
TABLE 1 . Characters of Stellio sacra specimens used for analysis.
(Table 2). Stellio sacra has a shorter tail
than Stellio badakhshanus, Stellio
chernovi, and Stellio himalayanus.
One of the paralectotypes, a female
(BMNH 1946.8.28.58), has a regenerated
tail. The length of the regenerated tail after
autotomy is about 80 mm which is rather
great. The scales of the tail are mucronate,
and the regular annular arrangement in the
regenerated portion of the tail is disturbed.
Stellio sacra has a more similar head
height index to Stellio erythrogaster and
Stellio lehmanni than to Stellio caucasius
and Stellio himalayanus (Ananjeva 1981);
i.e. the head is not so flat (depressed).
It is necessary to also remark about the
differences in the structure of the digits in
Stellio sacra and that of the specimens
examined of Stellio caucasius, Stellio
lehmanni, and Stellio stoliczkanus of the
same size. The digits, and especially the
terminal phalanges, of Stellio sacra
specimens are not round in their section as
in the above group of species, but instead
are compressed laterally.
The distinctive character of Stellio sacra
pholidosis is its comparative homogeneity.
The scales on the back, sides and belly are
small. It has a considerably large scale
count around the mid-body of 239 scales.
The mid-body scale count of Stellio
badakhshanus, Stellio chernovi, Stellio
himalayanus, and Stellio stoliczkanus all
do not exceed 180 scales. Such a large
mid-body scale count is only observed in
Stellio nuristanicus, which has from 230-
248 mid-body scales. During this phase of
our study two of the type specimens
(Anderson and Leviton 1969) were
examined.
The longitudinal rows of the enlarged
poorly keeled scales are not arranged as the
obvious "dorsal stripe," as typically
observed in many other species of Stellio.
The dorsal scales gradually decrease in size
and degree of keeling, from the center of
the back toward the small dorso-ventral
scales. The ventral scales are smaller than
the dorsal scales. The posterior margins of
these scales slightly overlap the scales of
the following row.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 109
FIG. 4. Distribution of Stellio himalayanus and Stellio sacra. Question mark indicates Xinjiang
Autonomous Region population of questionable taxonomic status.
The ventral head scales are also small
and not regular. The size of these scales
decreases from the nasal end toward the
gular fold. On the sides of the head and on
the neck are situated small groups of very
strongly keeled spinose scales.
Stellio sacra has nostrils shaped
longitudinally oval, similar to Stellio
chernovi and Stellio himalayanus. Where
as Stellio agrorensis, Stellio melanurus,
Stellio nuristanicus and Stellio tuberculatus
have round nostrils. Stellio sacra has a
round tympanum.
In Stellio sacra, the scales of the upper
surface of the fore and hind limbs are
comparatively small, but their size is similar
to the largest dorsal scales. These scales
are strongly keeled. Single slightly
enlarged scales are distinguishable from the
surrounding small scales. The scales on
the base of the tail are keeled and
mucronate, but to a smaller degree than for
example in Stellio himalayanus.
The results of the comparative study of
Asiatic rock agamids enables the typical
distinguishing characters of Stellio sacra to
be identified:
1 . The small size of the scales.
2. The presence of a short nuchal crest
made up of from two to three scale rows of
slightly enlarged, narrow, keeled, dark
colored scales. Such a nuchal crest is
absent in Stellio chernovi, Stellio
himalayanus, Stellio stoliczkanus and other
species. A nuchal crest is noted however in
Stellio melanurus, Stellio nuptus, Stellio
Stellio, and Stellio tuberculatus.
Vol. 3, p. 110
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
,- «
FIG. 5. Stellio sacra from elevation 3990 m, 52.4 km south of Yangbajan (30° 13' N 90° 25' E),
Xizang (Tibet) Autonomous Region, China.
3. The ends of the occipital (nuchal) and
neck scales are directed backwards but not
foreword; the parietal scales are oriented in
a laterocaudal direction.
4. The rows of the enlarged dorsal
scales are parallel but do not meet as in
species of the "Stellio himalayanus "
complex.
TABLE 2. Comparative data on the relative proportions of the tail, limbs, and head of rock agamids of the
genus Stellio (5. sacra and agamids of the 5. himalayanus complex).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.3, p. Ill
FIG. 6. Habitat of Stellio sacra, elevation 3990 m, 52.4 km south of Yangbajan (30° 13' N 90° 25' E),
Xizang (Tibet) Autonomous Region, China.
5. In the region over the shoulders
there are two arched diffuse rows of
slightly enlarged mucronate (spinose)
scales.
6. The absence of enlarged scales or
regions of enlarged scales on the back of
the body.
7. The upper head scales distributed
between the nasal scales have a stretched
shape. The length of these scales is twice
the width as also in Stellio agrorensis,
Stellio nuristanicus, and Stellio tuberculatus
where as the scales of Stellio chernovi and
Stellio himalayanus have a roundish,
polygonal shape.
8. Only a single row of small scales is
noted between the suboculars and the
supralabials. Other species have two to
five scale rows.
9. The scales of the back, shoulders,
thighs and some parietal scales have an
unusual microstructure. The margins of the
scales are jagged resembling that of fringes.
This character was also observed in Stellio
annectens, Stellio erythrogaster, Stellio
melanurus, and Stellio nuptus.
10. There is a patch of callous
(granular) scales in the middle of the belly,
which is large in males.
1 1 . The males have a large patch of anal
pores and from six to seven rows of callous
scales before the cloaca.
Coloration
The dorsal coloration of the type
Vol. 3, p. 112
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
specimens consists of diffuse components,
each scale is either totally dark or light in
coloration. The parietal region and along
the middle of the back (two scale rows of
absolutely dark scales) are more dark in
coloration. From the middle of the back to
the sides there are light brown transverse
stripes. This coloration is poorly
developed in some specimens.
The subadult specimen has a similar
small speckled pattern and in addition has
alternating light and dark transverse stripes
coming from the vertebral ridge toward the
sides of the body. This pattern is similar to
that of juvenile specimens of Stellio
tuberculatus.
As far as we can tell from the available
specimens of Stellio sacra, no contrasting
pattern and coloration on the surface of the
gular region, neck and nuchal region are
noted. Such a contrasting pattern and
coloration are typical for specimens of
Stellio himalayanus and related species.
Natural History
Stellio sacra are common in the rocky
hills surrounding the Lhasa Valley. They
were seen only on slopes covered with
large boulders (Fig. 6). Often a single
adult male occupied a pile of boulders in
association with several females and
juveniles. Stellio sacra is an agile, alert
species that is difficult to approach closely.
The only other reptile that occurs on the
rocky slopes is the gecko, Cyrtodactylus
tibetanus. Another agamid,
Phrynocephalus theobaldi is abundant on
the sandy soil at the base of the rocky hills.
Discussion
The large review of the rich Indian fauna
that Smith (1935) dealt with explains why
the Sacred Agamid, Stellio sacra, was
originally described as a subspecies of the
Himalayan agamid, Stellio himalayanus.
The study presented here concludes that
Stellio sacra is not related to the Stellio
himalayanus complex. On the other hand
the above descriptions of the morphological
characters do not allow an interpretation of
the direct relation of Stellio sacra to such
species as Stellio agrorensis, Stellio
melanurus, Stellio nuptus, and Stellio
tuberculatus. The characters which enable
us to bring together Stellio sacra and these
species should be considered as
plesiomorphic similarities. These
characters are long limbs, the presence of a
small gular sac and nuchal crest, the
polyannular structure of the caudal
segments, the juvenile color pattern, and so
on. This assumption about a plesiomorphic
condition is based on the idea that the
oligomerization (decreasing of number of
elements) of homologic organs (here
pholidosis elements) is one of the main
directions of agamid evolution (Dogel
1954).
Characters, such as the orientation of the
scale axes in nuchal and neck regions and
in parietal scales is also of great interest. It
is suggested (Peters unpublished data) that
the more common condition of the scale,
i.e. the orientation of the point backwards,
is typical not only for most of the species in
the genus Stellio (including Stellio sacra ),
but also for the majority of agamids and
lizards as a whole. Hence it is a
plesiomorphic condition. The contrary
direction, where the point of the scale is
forwards, is observed in Stellio melanurus,
Stellio nuptus and a number of African
species. In accordance with Peter's point
of view, this should be considered as an
apomorphic condition. However there is a
problem in interpreting such a character as
the presence of the scales with the jagged
margins. This scale structure is found in
species with both types of scale orientation,
including Stellio sacra as well as Stellio
erythrogaster, Stellio melanurus, Stellio
nuptus and the African species, Stellio
annectens. The interpretation of such
characters makes all possible explanations
of the relationships of these species
controversial.
These facts and the inability at this time
to determine even a single obvious
synapomorphy for all Asiatic rock agamids
of the genus Stellio (with or without Stellio
melanurus and Stellio nuptus ) does not
allow an acceptable phylogenetic
relationship to be developed. This problem
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 113
TABLE 3. The distribution of the species in the genus Stellio.
Species
Distribution
Stellio adramitana (Anderson 18%)
Stellio agrorensis (Stoliczka 1872)
Stellio annectens (Blanford 1870)
Stellio atricollis (Smith 1849)
Stellio badakhshanus (Anderson and Leviton 1969)
Stellio caucasius (Eichwald 1831)
Stellio chernovi (Ananjeva, Peters,
and Rzepakovsky 1981)
Stellio cyanogaster (Ruppell 1835)
Stellio erythrogaster (Nikolsky 1896)
Stellio himalayanus (Steindachner 1869)
Stellio lehmanni (Nikolsky 1896)
Stellio melanurus (Blyth 1854)
Stellio microlepis (Blanford 1874)
Stellio nuptus (De Filippi 1843)
Stellio nuristanicus (Anderson and Leviton 1969)
Stellio phillipsii (Boulenger 1895)
Stellio sacra (Smith 1935)
Stellio stellio (Linnaeus 1758)
Stellio stoliczkanus (Blanford 1875)
Stellio trachypleurus (Peters 1982)
Stellio tuberculatum (Hardwicke and Gray 1827)
Stellio yemenensis (Klauzewitz 1954)
Stellio zonorus (Boulenger 1895)
Arabia
Afghanistan, Pakistan, India
Africa (Somalia, Ethiopia)
Eastern and southern Africa
Afghanistan
Caucasus, Tadjikistan, Turkmania, Turkey,
Iran, Afghanistan, Pakistan
Tadjikistan, Turkmania, Uzbekistan
Iraq,
Somalia, Ethiopia
Iran, Turkmania
Tadjikistan, Uzbekistan, Afghanistan, Pakistan,
India
Tadjikistan, Turkmania, Uzbekistan, Afghanistan
Iran, Pakistan
Iran
Iraq, Iran, Afghanistan, Pakistan
Afghanistan
Ethiopia
Tibet
Greece, southwest Asia, northern Egypt
Mongolia, China
Ethiopia
India, Nepal, Afghanistan, Pakistan
Arabia
Somalia
may be explained not only by the small
sample size of Stellio sacra and the fact that
many other forms are poorly studied but
also by the obvious existence of parallel
trends in different developmental lines
within this lizard group.
In order to arrive at a more trust worthy
hypothesis of the relationships of rock
agamids, it is necessary to carry out
biochemical investigations. The first
preliminary results of such investigations
are that of Joger and Arano (1987) and
Ananjeva and Sokolova (in prep.). This
type of data will be highly interesting to
compare with the results of comparative
morphological studies.
The distributional patterns of Asiatic
rock agamids of the genus Stellio (Table 3)
and their chorological isolation seems to
support the idea that Stellio is a
monophyletic group. Rock agamids of the
genus Stellio are distributed from Greece
and the Nile River Delta in the west to the
Gobi Altai of southern Mongolia, and the
western deserts of China in the east. In the
western part of this region, Greece to the
Nile River Delta, Stellio stellio is found.
The southern portion of this region from
southwestern Iran to Pakistan Stellio
melanurus and Stellio nuptus occur.
These species are probably of African
origin (Peters unpublished). In southern
Iran and Afghanistan along with Stellio
melanurus and Stellio nuptus also occur
Stellio agrorensis, Stellio badakhshanus,
Stellio caucasius, Stellio erythrogaster,
Stellio himalayanus, Stellio microlepis,
and Stellio nuristanicus.
The Asiatic rock agamids of the genus
Stellio sensu stricto are absent from the
mountainous regions of western Indostan
Vol. 3, p. 114
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
and the eastern portion of the Arabian
Peninsula. They are also not found across
the Red Sea in Ethiopia and Somalia.
These areas are poorly studied
herpetologically and it is possible that they
do in fact occur in these regions.
The distribution of Asiatic rock agamids
seems to be a single unit. Most problematic
is the origin of such species as Stellio
melanurus, Stellio nuptus, and Stellio
stellio, which may be of African origin as it
was already mentioned above.
It is possible that this assumption will be
corroborated during further research in
biochemical phylogeny. The preliminary
results of Joger and Arano (1987) on
Stellio stellio is a first step. The origin of
the genus Stellio is interesting and the data
about the early divergence of Stellio in
Stellio sensu stricto (Asiatic species) and
the Stellio atricollis species group from
Africa and southern Arabia is useful (Joger
and Arano 1987). It is possible that Stellio
is a paraphyletic group of species. The
Arabian - African species group is Stellio
adramitana, Stellio annectens, Stellio
atricollis, Stellio cyanogaster, Stellio
phillipsi, Stellio trachypleurus, Stellio
yemenensis, and Stellio zonurus (Table
3). These species are similar to the Asiatic
species Stellio melanurus and Stellio
nuptus in a number of characters. This
allows an assumption that they are related.
Acknowledgments
We are most greatful for the loan of type
material of Stellio sacra from Dr. A. C. G.
Grandison, Dr. E. H. Arnold and Dr. A. F.
Stimson of the British Museum of Natural
History, London, Great Britain, and Dr.
Shara of the Indian Museum, Calcutta,
India.
Literature Cited
ANANJEVA, N. B. 1981. [The peculiarities of the
skull structures, dental system, and hyoid
apparatus of the lizards of Agama genus of the
USSR fauna]. Proceedings of the Zoological
Institute of the USSR Academy of Sciences,
Leningrad 101:3-20. (In Russian).
ANANJEVA, N. B., G. PETERS, AND V. T.
RZEPAKOWSKY. 1981. [New species of rock
agamid from Tadjikistan Agama chernovi sp.
nov.]. Proceedings of the Zoological Institute of
the USSR Academy of Sciences, Leningrad
101:23-27. (In Russian).
ANDERSON, S. T. AND A. E. LEVITON. 1969.
Amphibians and reptiles collected by the Street
Expedition to Afghanistan, 1965. Proceedings of
the California Academy of Sciences, series 4.
37(2):25-56.
DOGEL, V. A. 1954. [Oligomerization of the
homological organs as one of the main
tendencies of animal evolution]. Leningrad
State University. 368 pp. (In Russian).
HU, S., E. ZHAO, Y. JIANG, L. FEI, C. YE, Q.
HU, Q. HUANG, Y. HUANG, AND W. TIAN.
(incorrectly stated in English as Hu, S, L. Fei,
Q. Hu, Q. Huang, Y. Huang, Y. Jiang, W.
Tian, C. Ye, E. Zhao). 1987. Amphibia-
Reptilia of Xizang. The series of the scientific
expedition to the Qinghai-Xizang Plateau. The
comprehensive scientific expedition to Qinghai-
Xizang Plateau, Academia Sinica. Chengdu
Institute of Biology, Academi (sic.) Sinica. 153
pp. (If Chinese).
JOGER, U. AND B. ARANO. 1987. Biochemical
phylogeny of the Agama genus group. Pp. 215-
218. In Van Gelder, Strijbosch.and Bergers
(eds.). Proceedings of the 4th Ordinary General
Meeting of the Society of European
Herpetologists, Nijmegen.
MOODY, S. M. 1980. Phylogenetic and historical
biogeographical relationships of the genera in the
Agamidae (Reptilia: Lacertilia). Ph.D. Thesis.
University of Michigan. 373 pp.
PETERS, C. 1982. Eine neue Wirtelschwanzagame
aus Ostafrika (Agamidae: Agama ).
Mitteilungen aus der Zoologishen Sammlung des
Museums fur Naturkunde in Berlin 58(2):265-
268.
SMITH, M. A. 1935. The fauna of British India,
including Ceylon and Burma. Reptilia and
Amphibia. Vol. II. Sauria. Taylor and Francis,
London. 440 pp.
SOKOLOVSKY, V. V. 1975. [Comparative
karyological study of the lizards from the family
Agamidae. II. Karyotypes of five species of the
genus Agama ]. Cytologica 16(l):91-93. (In
Russian).
April 1990 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 3, p. 115
SOKOLOVSKY, V. V. 1977. [Taxonomic
relationships in the family Agamidae according
to karyological data]. Soviet Herpetological
Conference, Leningrad. [English abstract, in
Russian].
WERMUTH, H. 1967. Liste der rezenten
Amphibien und Reptilien: Agamidae. Das
Tierreich 86, Berlin. 127 pp.
I April 1990"
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 116-119|
Isolation and Amino Acid Sequence of a New Dodecapeptide from the Skin
of Oreolalax pingii +
YIQUAN TANG1, SHENGHAI TlAN1, SHIXIANG WU1, JlACHENG HUA1, XlNQUAN Jl1,
GUANFU WU2, ERMI ZHAO2, AND GANG ZOU1
^Shanghai Institute of Materia Medica, Academia Sinica, Shanghai, China
2Chengdu Institute of Biology, P.O. Box 416, Academia Sinica, Chengdu, China
Abstract. -A novel dodecapeptide has been isolated by alumina column chromatography and HPLC from
methanol extracts of the skin of the Chinese frog Oreolalax pingii. The sequence of the peptide is: Gly-
Leu-Val-Ser-Asp-Leu-Met-Tyr-Gly-Ile-Gly-Leu-NH2 Th's peptide differs from all the other amphibian skin
peptides and should be regarded as a member of a new peptide family.
Key Words: Amphibia, Anura, Pelobatidae, Oreolalax pingii, China, biochemistry, peptides.
Introduction
Many active peptides have been
discovered from amphibian skin during the
past 20 years or more. Amphibian skin
peptides have proved to be of considerable
value not only in pharmacology, but also in
taxonomic and evolutionary domains
(Erspamer 1984; Cei 1985; Lazarus et al.
1985). In order to discover new active
peptides, we have carried out research on
amphibian skin peptides from Chinese
frogs since 1983 (Hua et al. 1985; Tang et
al. 1985). This paper concerns another
novel dodecapeptide obtained from the skin
of Oreolalax pingii.
Methods
The materials and experimental
procedures were previously reported (Tang
et al. 1985), with the following brief
mentions and additions.
Six hundred specimens of Oreolalax
pingii were collected in May, 1983 from the
Daliangshan of Sichuan Province, China.
The fresh skins (400 g) were removed and
extracted with methanol. The methanol
extracts were evaporated until dry. The
residue was dissolved in 95% ethanol and
the solution distributed on the alumina
* This publication combines material previously
published in Chinese by Tang et al (1985) with
additional information.
columns. The column was eluted with
ethanol-water mixtures of descending
concentrations of ethanol (also see
Montecucchi et al. 1981)
HPLC was performed on a Waters
HPLC system. Details of individual
chromatographic procedure are shown in
the figures. Amino acid analysis of
peptides after hydrolysis in HC1 were
carried out on a LKB 4400 amino acid
analyzer. Sequence analysis of the peptides
were performed by manual DABITC/PITC
procedure (Chang 1983). The complete
sequence analysis of the dodecapeptide was
carried out on an Applied Biosystems
Model 470A gas phase sequencer.
Enzymatic digestions of the peptide with
a-Chymotrypsin, carboxypeptidase A (CP-
A) and Y (CP-Y) were also as before (Tang
et al. 1985). Bioassays of each isolated
product were tested on the longitudinal
muscle myenteric plexus preparation of the
guinea pig ileum (GPI),
Results
The water portion eluted from alumina
columns was lyophilized to give 214 mg of
residue. The residue was separated by
HPLC semi-preparatively as in Fig. 1.
Perks 32 and 33 each were single peak by
verifying on HPLC (analytical uBondapak
Cj8 column, the elution conditions were the
same as in Fig. 1), respectively. The
ir»r»r\ i_.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 117
100
o
CM
C\J
<
40 60
time(min)
FIG. 1. RP-HPLC of the water eluate from the alumina columns. Column: uBondapak C\% 7.8X300
mm. Mobile phase: A=0.05% CF3COOH B=60% CH3CN in A. Concave gradient elution from 0-85%B
(dotted line), 90 min, at 1.0 ml/min. Detected at UV 220 nm, 0.4 aufs.
Gly-Leu-Val-Ser-Asp-Leu-Met-Tyr-Gly-Ile-Gly-Leu-NH2
■GH-1-
A h
■CH-2-
FlG. 2. Profile of sequence anlaysis of the dodecapeptide. (-*): DABITC/PITC method. (-»): gas
phase sequencing. («-): CP-Y digestion. CH: a-chymotryptic peptides.
difference of retention time of the two
peaks was 0.8 min. The peak 32 acted as
the representative of the dodecapeptide for
further studies and the peak 33 was also
investigated simultaneously.
Amino acid composition of the peak 32
was Asp (1), Ser (l),Gly (3), Val (1), Met
(1), He (1), Leu (3), Tyr (1). Amino acid
sequence of the peak 32 was determined by
the DABITC/PITC method and gas phase
sequencing. The former method proceeded
to the tenth step, but the latter to the
penultimate residue (Fig. 2). For C-
terminal residue analysis, CP-A and CP-Y
digestions of the peak 32 were carried out,
and did not release any amino acids by the
former. This indicated a blocked C-
terminus; upon latter, however, Leu and
Gly were obtained. Thus, we deduced that
the C-terminal structure of the peak 32 is
Leu-NH2. Digestion of the peptide by a-
chymotrypsin provided further structural
confirmation. The fragment peptides, CH-
1 and CH-2 were separated on HPLC as
depicted in Fig. 3. Amino acid
compositions of the two fragments are in
accordance with their sequences (see
Fig. 2), respectively.
From the above results the complete
amino acid sequence of the peak 32 was
Vol. 3, p. 118
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
0.2-r
100
10
20
30
time(min)
40
50
60
FIG. 3. RP-HPLC of a-chymotryptic digests of the dodecapeptide. Column: uBondapak Cis 3.9X300
mm. Mobile phase: A=0.1% CF3COOH B=60% CH3CN in A. Linear gradient elution from 0-60%B ,
40 min, at 0.6 ml/min. Detected at UV 220 nm, 0.2 aufs. Peak (*) is the unreacted dodecapeptide.
established as in Fig. 2.
The peak 33 had the same properties
with the peak 32 in the amino acid
compositions and sequence analysis,
respectively. We do not know the
structural differences between the two
peaks.
Based on the amino acid analysis, the
yield of the pure dodecapeptide (including
peak 32 and 33 in Fig. 1) was estimated to
be at least 1.0 nmol starting from 1.0 g of
fresh skin, according to that the rate of
recovery of all above isolation steps was
10%. The dodecapeptide was inactive in
GPI test, and its activity awaits to be
established by assay methods other than
those used in the present screening.
Discussion
The dodecapeptide described above is a
completely novel peptide. The peptide may
be a member of a new peptide family, and it
should be regarded as the biochemical
characteristic of Oreolalax pingii in
taxonomy. Furthermore, the C-terminal
portion of the dodecapeptide has some
homologies to the mammalian Leu-
enkephalin (Hughes et al. 1975) as shown
below:
The dodecapeptide: Gly-Leu-Val-Ser-Asp-
Leu-Met-Try-Gly-Ile-Gly-Leu-NH2
Leu-enkephalin: Try-Gly-Gly-Phe-Leu
In amphibian skin peptide research, it
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 119
was observed that one peptide can be
separated by HPLC into two components—
the peak splitting, such as that discovered
in HPLC separation of PGL-a (Andreu et
al. 1985) and ranamargatin (Tang et al.
1988). The peak 32 and 33 (Fig. 1) both
have the same amino acid composition and
sequence. Therefore, they may be
produced by one peptide in HPLC
separation. The reason of the peak splitting
mentioned above, however, is presently not
known. To our knowledge, there are no
similar findings besides the amphibian skin
peptides. Hence, it is necessary to
understand if the peak splitting is unique to
the amphibian skin peptides.
Acknowledgments
We thank Mr. C. Chen for amino acid
analysis.
Literature Cited
ANDREU, D., H. ASCHAUER, G. KREIL, AND R.
B. MERRIFIELD 1985. Solid-phase synthesis
of PYLa and isolation of its natural counterpart,
PGLa[PYLa-(4-24) peptide amide] from skin
secretion of Xenopus laevis. European Journal
of Biochemistry 149:531-535.
CEI, J.M. 1985. Taxonomic and evolutionary
significance of peptides in amphibian skin.
Peptides 6(Suppl. 3): 13-16.
CHANG, J. 1983. Manual micro-sequence analysis
of polypeptides using dimethylaminoazobenzene
isothiocyanate. Methods in Enzymology
91:455-466.
ERSPAMER, V. 1984. Half a century of
comparative researchs on biogenic amines and
active peptides in amphibian skin and molluscan
tissues. Comparative Biochemistry and
Physiology 79C: 1-7.
HUA, J., S. WU, Y. TANG, W. ZHANG, AND G.
ZOU 1985 [Isolation and characterization of
bradykinin and its two fragments from the skin
of the Chinese frog Rana nigromaculata ]. Acta
Biochemica Biophysica Sinica 17:171-173. (In
Chinese).
HUGHES, J., T. W. SMITH, H. W. KOSTERLITZ,
L. A. FOTHERGILL, B. A. MORGAN, AND H.
R. MORRIS. 1975. Identification of two
related pentapeptides from the brain with potent
opiate agonist activity. Nature (London)
258:577-579.
LAZARUS, L.H., W. E. WILSON, G. GAUDINO, B.
J. IRONS, AND A. GUGLIETTA 1985.
Evolutionary relationships between non-
mammalian and mammalian peptides. Peptides
6(Suppl. 3):295-307.
MONTECUCCHI, P.C., R. DE CASTIGLIONE, S.
PIANI, L. GOZZIN, AND V. ERSPAMER 1981.
Amino acid composition and sequence of
dermorphin, a novel opiate-like peptide from the
skin of Phyllomedusa sauvagei. International
Journal of Peptide Protein Research 17:275-284.
TANG, Y., S. TIAN, S. WU, J. HUA, G. HU, X.
JI, G. ZOU, G. WU, AND E. ZHAO. 1985.
[Separation and structure of a novel hexapeptide
obtained from the skin of Oreolalax pingii].
Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(2):99-102.
(In Chinese).
TANG, Y., S. TIAN, S. WU, J. HUA, G. WU, E.
ZHAO, Y. LU, Y. ZHU, AND G. ZOU. 1988.
[Isolation and structure of ranamargarin, a new
tachykinin from the skin of Chinese frog Rana
margaratae ]. Scienua Sinica (B) 9:967-974. (In
Chinese).
I April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.3, pp. 120-122
The Validity of Sacalia quadriocellata
JINZHONG FU1 AND ERMI ZHAO2
^Zoological Institute, Academia Sinica, Beijing, China
^Chengdu Institute of Biology, Academia Sinica, P. 0. Box 416, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Key Words: Reptilia, Testudines, Emydidae, Sacalia quadriocellata, China, taxonomic validity.
Introduction
Sacalia quadriocellata was first
described by Siebenzock in 1903 as
Clemmys bealei quadriocellata. Pope
(1935) described Clemmys quadriocellata
from Hainan, and compared it with
Clemmys bealei. But most people except
Pope thought that S. quadriocellata was a
synonym of S. bealei. Sachsse (1984a)
held that it was the female of S. bealei.
Methods
Specimens of Sacalia quadriocellata
from Hainan and Guangxi provinces, along
with specimens of S. bealei from Hainan,
Fujian and Anhui provinces were
examined. Data were taken on external,
skull, and shell suture characters. Sexual
differences were also examined.
Results
External differences
1) The dorsal surface of the head is
uniform olive or chocolate brown in Sacalia
quadriocellata , but it is vermiculated with
black in S. bealei.
2) Sacalia quadriocellata have two ocelli
on each side of the dorsal surface of the
head. The ocelli always have distinct
boundaries and there is one black spot
within each ocellus (Fig. 1). In contrast,
S. bealei have one or two ocelli on each
side of the dorsal surface of the head
(Fig. 1). If two ocelli are present, they
may not have clear boundaries, but tend to
run together. There are from one to three
black spots within each ocellus.
3) The anterior margin of the carapace has
many little black or chocolate brown
speckles in Sacalia bealei . There are few
or none in S. quadriocella .
Differences in skull characters
1) The length from anterior of prefrontal to
posterior of basi occipital to supra occipital
is 2.59-2.62 (N = 3) in S. bealei ; but
2.92-3.39 (N = 3) in S. quadriocellata..
2) The quadrate is not in contact with the
opisthotic in Sacalia bealei, but in S.
quadriocellata the posterior part of the
quadrate tends to contact the opisthotic.
abed
FIG. 1. Ocelli of Sacalia quadriocellata and S. bealei. A: Male 5. quadriocellata. B: Female S.
quadriocellata. C: S. bealei with a pair of ocelli. C: S. bealei with two pairs of ocelli.
(Pi ioon v,„
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 121
TABLE 1 . Analysis of shell suture data.
Fig. 2 for details of measurement.
See
FIG. 2. Means of measurement of shell sutures.
3) The posterior process of the jugal turns
up in S. bealei, but turns down in S.
quadriocellata.
4) The shortest distance between the orbital
is located at the anterior prefrontal in
Sacalia bealei. It is located at the joint of
the frontal and prefrontal in S .
quadriocellata.
Shell suture differences
Thirteen shell suture characters in S.
bealei (N = 27) and S. quadriocellata
(N = 26) were analyzed (Fig. 2). Seven
characters (PA/PL, PB/PL, PE/PL, IH/PL,
IAB/PL, IAN/PL, BL/PL) are different
from each other (t, p< 0.05), [Table 1].
Sexual dimorphism
Sexual dimorphism was evident in
Sacalia quadriocellata. In life, males have
very distinct orange-red speckles near the
neck and limbs, whereas females have not.
The carapace is narrower at the anterior end
than the posterior end in females, but both
ends are nearly equal in males. The most
interesting character is ocelli coloration.
They tend to be greyish with a white ring
surrounding the two ocelli on each side in
males (Fig. 1), but tend to be yellow
without a white ring in females. The skulls
of the males were somewhat flat, narrow
and long. The skulls of the females were
somewhat convex, wide and short.
Discussion
Since Sacalia bealei and S .
quadriocellata have distinguishable
characters, we consider 5. quadriocellata
to be a valid name. Scalia quadriocellata
occurs in China on Hainan Island and
Guangxi Province. It is also found in
central Annam. The specimens reported on
by Zheng and Ding (1965) from Fujian
Province and by Zhong (1981) from
Jiangxi Province are misidentified S.
bealei. The later species ranges over most
of southern China, including Guizhou,
Anhui, Jiangxi, Fujian, Guangdong
provinces, Hainan Island, and Hong Kong.
Vol. 3, p. 122
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Literature Cited
Salamandra 11:20-26.
FANG P. W. 1934. Notes on some Chelonians of
China. Sinensia 4(7): 145- 199.
POPE, C. H. 1935. The reptiles of China.
Natural History of Central Asia, Vol. 10.
American Museum of Natural History, New
York. 604 pp.
SACHSSE W. 1984. Chinemys reevesii var.
unicolor und Clemmys bealei var.
quadriocellata — Auspragungen von Sexual
dormorphismus der beiden, Nominat formen.
SCHMIDT K. P. 1927. The reptiles of Hainan.
Bulletin American Museum of Natural History
65:395-465.
ZHENG J. AND H. DING. 1965. [A preliminary
survey of the turtles and tortoises from Fukien].
Journal of Fukien Teachers College 1:163-193.
(In Chinese).
ZHONGC. 1981. [Two new records of reptiles of
Jiangxi Province]. Acta Herpetologica Sinica
1981,5(15):95-98. (In Chinese).
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 123-i:
Interim Report on the Freshwater Turtle Trade in Bangladesh
S. M. A. RASHID1 AND IAN. R. SWINGLAND1
^Durrell Institute of Conservation and Ecology, Rutherford College. University of Kent, Canterbury, Kent
CT2 7NX, United Kingdom
Key Words: Reptilia, Testudines, Bangladesh, conservation, commercial trade.
Introduction
Trade in the freshwater turtle species of
Bangladesh has been occurring for a very
long time. Exploitation of this natural
resourse was limited prior to 1980, but
during the past decade there has been a
rapid and drastic increase both in terms of
commercial exploitation and volume of
trade. At present freshwater turtles are
captured everywhere in the country. Since
there are potential buyers, who have
emerged due to the increase in turtle trade,
the hunters prefer to sell their catches to
those buyers rather than selling it in the
small country markets.
Turtle meat has served as a source of
protein to most of the ethnic groups and
non-moslems in Bangladesh. The turtle
meat and eggs are mostly consumed by the
Hindus and to some extent by the
Christians, Buddhists and other minorities.
Recent observations indicate that the rate of
turtle meat consumption has accelerated due
to the high price of other meat sources,
making them unaffordable to most people,
as well as the scarcity of fish and meat
products. This trend has already proved to
be a threat to the chelonian population.
Many of the freshwater turtles are
becoming rarer. Personal observations and
interviews with the local people and hunters
(turtle catchers) have confirmed it.
Lack of turtle trade regulation is also one
of the reasons for the increase in the
magnitude of turtle trade. Though on paper
the Forest Department, "godfather" of all
the wildlife in Bangladesh, looks after it
practically there is no one to execute the
regulation. There is no regulation to
control the hunting and capturing of the
turtles. As a result, freshwater turtles are
exported all round the year though the bulk
fluctuates with the season. Some of the
freshwater turtles are included in CITES I,
but trade is still continuing. The
Bangladesh Wildlife (Preservation
Amendment) Act, 1973 does not include
any turtle species in its schedules and as
such gives free access to the exporters.
Moreover the government also charges a
nominal amount of duty (Taka 5.00 per
maund) on the export.
Study Period
This is a preliminary report on the
freshwater turtle trade in Bangladesh,
covering the period from May 1989 to mid-
August, 1989. The work is still in
progress and the final report will be
submitted after the completion of the study.
Objectives
The primary objectives of this study are to
identify/determine:
1. Species involved in trade.
2. Volume of trade.
3. Proportion of each species exported.
4. Methods of collecting.
5. Major collecting sites, habitat
preferences of the species concerned.
6. Sex ratio of the species exported.
7. Status of the species in the wild
involved in trade.
8. Methods of transportation, packing,
stocking.
9. Mortality rate during transportation.
Previous Information
The chelonian fauna of Bangladesh are
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 124
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Year
FIG. 1. Monetary value in Bangladesh Taka of
turtle export from 1972 through 1987. The current
exchange rate is approximately $1 US = Taka 30.
Figures are as reported by the Bangladesh Export
Promotion Bureau.
not well documented. We have to rely
mostly on Smith (1931), and it is necessary
to revise and update the information for
most of the chelonians. Later works
include that of Ahmed (1958), Shaft and
Quddus (1977), Husain (1979), Khan
(1982,1985) and Fugler (1984). All these
publications throw some light on the
chelonians with some indication of the
species being exploited for trade either
locally or for export. Fugler (1984) put
forward further information on the extent of
trade and the species involved. But since
he worked for a very short time much
information is lacking. A recent study by
Hosain (1989 unpublished) gives some
information on the food and feeding habits
of some freshwater turtles in Bangladesh.
Information on turtle export is also on file
at the Export Promotion Bureau (EPB).
They only give the value of the turtles
exported (Fig. 1). Neither the quantity nor
the species are known.
Methods
Based on earlier information regarding
the location of some of the turtle export
centers, those centers were visited and the
owners were briefed about our intention to
collect information on the turtle trade.
These centers were located at Baidyar
Bazar, Sonargaon; Narayanganj (BIWTA
Ghat, Jam Tala, Panchaputi); and Dhaka
(Mirpur Section 1 and 10) [Fig. 2].
After seeking information about the
export schedule, members of the study
group were present physically at the centers
observing the packing methods, taking
measurements of the turtles exported,
identifying and sexing them and also
estimating the proportion of each species
exported in the consignment. The group
members had to face a lot of non-
cooperative attitudes from the traders. But
patience and interest proved worthwhile
and when the traders understood that we
are not doing any harm to their trade, they
gradually came forward.
At present the first author and two
research assistants are working on this
turtle trade project. The two export centers
located within the metropolis Dhaka,
Mirpur Sec. 1 and Sec. 10, are being visited
weekly. Turtles are being exported every
week and those are being monitored. The
other centers are being visited once in a
fortnight but it is not possible to check the
turtle specimens there. The reason for this
is that those centers are located far away
and that in all the cases the turtles are
packed for export after midnight so that
they can be transported to the airport by
dawn when most of the airlines are
operating to the Far East. Most of these
turtles are destined for Japan, Hong Kong,
Singapore, Thailand and Malaysia where
they are mostly used for food.
Results
Zia International Airport, Dhaka is the
only shipping port. The turtles are
exported live, packed in bamboo-woven
wicker baskets. Two to three individuals
weighing about 10 - 12 kg are packed in a
single basket but when the specimen is
large, it is packed singly. Prior to packing
the turtles are washed and cleaned of any
foreign material. The sturdy cord which is
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 125
BANGLADESH
International Boundary
District Boundary
Subdivisional Boundary
FIG. 2. Regional map of Bangladesh.
Vol. 3, p. 126
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
used to tie the fore and hind limbs of the
turtle on each side together (to restrict its
movement) is cut off and then the
individuals are placed in the baskets to be
packed. The lid is placed over the basket
and tied with aluminium wires. The packed
baskets are marked with the trademark of
the exporter and then transported to the
airport. Turtles under 1 kg in weight are
not exported. While weighing, packing the
exporters do not treat the different species
separately.
During this period (summer), the volume
of trade is much less. Because of monsoon
rain the water level rises and it becomes
difficult to catch turtles. But according to
some of the turtle hunters the catch is
greater because of increased rate of
movement of the turtles and the hunters can
also maneuver and place traps and other
collecting gears in suitable localities. The
peak time for exporting the turtles is winter
(late October- February). At that time the
number of individuals as well as the
number of species is higher compared to
the summer catches.
Information is being collected about the
frequency of catches of the different species
in different seasons and also in different
habitats.
During this interim period it has been
observed that 1 metric ton of live
freshwater turtles are exported every week.
The volume is much less than during the
peak time, in winter, when the volume rises
to 5 - 6 metric tons per week. Presently
turtles are being shipped once a week but
during winter they are shipped almost
everyday. The species exported during this
period were Aspideretes hurum, and/4.
gangeticus. Aspideretes hurum comprises
the major portion of the bulk followed by
A. gangeticus. Lissemys punctata is not
being exported but smuggled to
neighboring India with whom Bangladesh
shares most of the boundaries. The sex
ratio of the exported turtles have been
found to be 45.71% males and 54.29%
females irrespective of the species. The
average weight of the exported turtles was
7.72 kg ranging from 1 kg to 33.20 kg.
From one of the export centers in Dhaka
4017 kg of live turtles were exported from
June 10th to August 21st . The ratio of the
turtles, in terms of number of individuals
were A. hurum 11.43% and A .
gangeticus- 28.57% and in terms of weight
was A. hurum 83.62%; A. gangeticus-
16.48%. Assuming that turtle demand for
export is the same and that the number of
people going for it is also the same, the
decline in the export figures during 1987-
88 (Fig. 1) can be related to the decline of
the turtle population in the wild. There are
occasional reports of Kachuga tecta
hatchlings being exported to Japan for pet
trade. About 200 hatchlings were exported
in 1988, and 40 kilograms of live Kachuga
tecta hatchlings and juveniles were
exported to Singapore last year. In June
1989, there was a consignment of 40 kilos
of live Geochlemys hamiltoni shipped to
Singapore.
The prices of the turtles also vary
considerably. The collectors sell A .
hurum, A. gangeticus and Chitra indica at
the rate of Taka 1200 - 1300 per maund (1
maund = 33 kg. approx.) to the middleman
(locally known as maha ian or bePari) who
in turn sells it at the rate of Taka 1400 -
1500 to the suppliers, who feed the
exporters. The rate of the final exchange
between the supplier and the exporter is not
known. Lissemys punctata is bought at the
rate of Taka 500 - 600 per maund from the
collectors and sold by the middleman to the
supplier at the rate of Taka 700 per maund
(1 US $ = Taka 30). Last year at one time
the prices went up to Taka 1 100 - 1200 per
maund. The meat of the turtles which die
off during transportation is consumed
locally and is sold at the rate of Tk.50 - 55
per kilogram and that of L. punctata Tk. 15
per kg. Kachuga tecta is being sold in the
country markets at the rate of Tk. 10 - Tk.
15 per kilo. Earlier the money was
channeled down by the exporter to the
supplier, who gave it to the middleman and
finally it reached the collectors. The
collectors were committed to the
middleman to supply turtles at a rate
determined by him. This trend has changed
a lot now. The middleman invests his own
money and the collectors negotiate to fix the
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 127
rate. This is because of the low rate of
catches. The collectors complain of the
non-availability of the turtles and the
middleman has to comply with it.
Recently the working group has been
able to contact the airport officials in Dhaka
by whom the exact weight of the turtles
shipped is recorded. In most of the cases
the weight figures measured in front of the
group members at the turtle export centers
are not the same as the airport figures. The
airlines carrying it and the final destination
of the shipment will be known. Very often
this information is concealed by the
exporters. Also the business organizations
exporting turtles will be known. So far
some of the exporters have been contacted.
The Forest Department personnel have also
been contacted and liaison is being
maintained with them.
Based on the information from the turtle
suppliers about the collecting sites, the
senior author and research assistants have
travelled extensively to some areas in south
Bangladesh to see the techniques used to
collect chelonians and the habitat from
where they are collected. Some of the
major supply and collecting areas have been
identified. Interviews have been taken of
the traders and hunters and collectors. The
areas visited thus far are Maijdi,
Begumganj, Chandraganj, Lakhipur,
Dalalbazar, Char, Alexandar, Ramgoti,
Comilla, Laksham, Chandpur, Hajiganj,
Sahatali, and Chittagong.
Discussion
Species Involved in
Local and International Trade
The freshwater turtles found in
Bangladesh belong to the families
Trionychidae and Emydidae (Testudines,
Reptilia).
Family Trionychidae
Subfamily Cyclanorbinae
1. Lissemys punctata andersoni (Lacepede
1788), Flapshell Turtle.
Subfamily Trionychinae
2. Aspideretes gangeticus (Meylan 1987),
Softshell turtle
3. Aspideretes hurum (Meylan 1987),
Peacock Softshell Turtle.
Family Emydidae
Subfamily Batagurinae
4. Geoclemmys hamiltoni (Gray 1831),
Spotted Pond Turtle.
5. Morenia petersi (Anderson 1879), Eyed
Turtle.
6. Hardella thurji (Gray 1831), Crowned
River Turtle.
7. Kachuga tecta (Gray 1831), Roofed
Turtle.
8. Kachuga tentoriaflaviv enter (Gray
1834), Tent Turtle.
Classification follows Obst (1988). The
generic name of Trionyx has been replaced
by Aspideretes and the common English
names are used following Stubbs (1989).
There are reports of some of the other
species being involved in the trade, like
Chitra indica, Kachuga dhongoka and
some others. But during the interim study
period, no specimens of these species were
observed. This gives rise to a great
concern for particularly C. indica. In the
past this species has been heavily exploited
and the hunters and exporters believe that
there is a serious decline in its population.
Pelochelys bibroni was included in the
chelonian list by Shafi and Quddus (1977),
Husain (1979), and Khan (1982, 1985) but
no precise localities were mentioned.
Fugler (1984) was also not certain whether
this species is included in trade or not.
All the species mentioned above are
consumed locally, mostly by the non-
moslems. The rate of consumption has
increased to a considerable extent, which
needs to be monitored.
Species Involved in International Trade
1. Lissemys punctata andersoni.
2. Aspideretes gangeticus.
3. Aspideretes hurum.
Vol. 3, p. 128
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
4. Kachuga tecta.
5. Hardella thurji.
6. Geoclemmys hamiltoni.
Because of the wide distribution and
availability of Lissemys punctata, it is
consumed on most occasions. Apart from
this, a good lot is also smuggled to India.
The present investigator detected one
smuggling route in eastern Bangladesh.
There are reports of some more well
established routes in the northwest and
southwest Bangladesh. Kachuga tecta is
also consumed quite often. It is estimated
that most of the ethnic groups in the
northeast, northwest and southeast
consume at least either one Kachuga tecta
or Lissemys punctata per week per
household.
Acknowledgments
The authors are grateful to "Care for the
Wild", Horsham, U.K., for sponsoring
this project. Thanks are also due to
Messers Md. Ghulam Mustafa,
Rasheduzzaman Ahmed and Najmul Hasan
for their tireless assistance in carrying out
the study. Cooperation extended by Mr.
Hashem, owner of the Mirpur, Sec. 10,
Turtle Supply Center deserves mention.
Last but not least, we thank Mr. Bill Jordan
for his whole hearted cooperation from the
very beginning, and Mr. Clifford Warwick
for his suggestions.
Literature Cited
AHMAD, N. 1958. On edible turtles and tortoises
of East Pakistan. Directory of Fisheries, East
Pakistan. 18 pp.
FUGLER, C. M. 1984. The commercially
exploited Chelonia of Bangladesh: taxonomy,
ecology, reproductive biology and ontogeny.
Fisheries Information Bulletin 2(l):l-52.
HOSAIN, L. 1989. Ecology of freshwater turtles
of Bangladesh. Masters thesis. Department of
Zoology, University of Dhaka. Unpublished.
HUSAIN, K. Z. 1979. Bangladesher bonyajontu-
swampad o tar songrakhshan. Bangla Academy
Bignan Patrika 5(3):29-31 (In Bangla).
KHAN, M. A. R. 1982. Chelonians of Bangladesh
and their conservation. Journal of the Bombay
Natural History Society 79:1 10-1 16.
KHAN, M. A. R. 1985. Bangladesher bonya
prani. Vol. I. Amphibian & Reptiles. Bangla
Academy, Dhaka. 169 pp. (In Bangla).
OBST, F. J. 1988. Turtles, tortoises and terrapins.
St. Martin's Press, New York. 230 pp.
SHAFI, M. AND M. M. A. QUDDUS. 1979.
Bangladesher mothshya swampada. Bangla
Academy Bignan Potrika 3(2): 14-36 (In Bangla).
SMITH, M. 1931. The fauna of British India,
including Ceylon and Burma. Reptilia and
Amphibia. Vol. 1. Loricata and Testudines.
Taylor and Francis, London. 185 pp.
STUBBS, D. 1989. Tortoises and freshwater
turtles. An action plan for their conservation.
IUCN/SSC Tortoise and Freshwater Turtle
Specialist Group. IUCN, Gland, Switzerland.
47 pp.
I April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, pp. 129-136
The Past and Present Situation of the Chinese Alligator
Bihui Chen1
^Department of Biology, Anhui Normal University, Wuhu, Anhui, China
Key Words: Reptilia, Crocodilia, Alligatoridae, Alligator sinensis, China, endangered species, history,
conservation.
Introduction
The Chinese Alligator is one of 21
species of existing crocodilians in the world
today. Their numbers have dwindled and
their distribution is so narrow that it has
aroused concern among experts,
conservationists, and amateurs in wildlife at
home and abroad. It is reported in foreign
countries that the Chinese Alligator is an
extinct animal in the wilderness. It has
been placed on the list of endangered
species by the International Union for the
Conservation of Nature and Natural
Resources. How did the Chinese Alligator
live? How does it live now? This is a
problem of worldwide attention.
Changes in the geographic
distribution of the Chinese alligator
The fossils of the Chinese Alligator have
been found in Taian and Yanzhou in
Shandong Province, Maqian in Shanghai,
Yuyao in Zhejiang Province, and Hexian in
Anhui Province. In addition, some
unidentified fossil alligators have been
discovered on the south border of the
Junggar Basin in Xinjiang Uygur
Autonomous Region; Jiulengshan, Douan
in Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous Region;
Nanjing in Jiangsu Province; and Danxian
in Hainan Province. These fossils reveal
that the range of the Chinese Alligator
extended from Taian, Shandong Province,
to Yuyao, Zhejing Province during the
Neolithic age of the Recent epoch. If the
unidentified alligator fossils are included,
the range during the late Eocene and the
beginning of the Oligocene would have
extended from Shanghai and Yuyao,
Zhejiang Province in the east, as far west as
Douan, Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous
Region to the border of Hainan Island in
the south, and to the Junggar Basin,
Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region in the
north.
According to ancient records which can
be traced back to 3000 before present, the
habitat of the Chinese Alligator was limited
to the extensive lake and marshland of the
middle-lower Yangtse River, along the
banks of the Yangtse River from Shanghai
to Jiangling City in Hubei Province, around
Dongting Lake in southern Hubei and
northern Hunan Provinces, including the
extensive river network between the two
provinces, and the Shaoxing, south of
Hangzhou Bay in Zhejiang Province,
approximately 28.5° - 32.5° N, 116.6° -
121.9° E. This range probable continued
until the mid- 19th century. However, in
many regions, the Chinese Alligator
became extinct. Reliable records show that
they became extinct in the south of
Hangzhou Bay in 1201 AD. A great
number were killed around Nanjing in the
1870's. The bank of the Yangtse River
frequently collapsed, and flooding
occurred. It was thought that the alligators
picked holes along the bank and caused the
disasters. Thus, people killed a great deal
of alligators, and drove them to extinction
there.
The investigation in the 1950's revealed
that the range of the Chinese Alligator
stretched west from Pengze in Jiangxi
Province, east to the west bank of Tai
Lake, the north border of the Yangtse
River, and south at the foot of Mt. Huang.
To the north of Mt. Dongtianmu, 30.0° -
31.6° N, 118° - 120°E, the range has
dwindled. Further supplementary
investigations beginning in 1976 proved
1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 130
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
that the range became smaller and was
limited to ponds of a hilly region to the
north of Mt. Huang, below 200 meters in
elevation. There were a few individuals
that extended northward along the riverside
plain, and even as far as the Yangtse River,
approx. 30.6° - 31.6° N, 118.0° - 119.6°E.
Within this range, they are sparse. The
present habitat of the species is mainly
located in some villages in Xuancheng,
Nanling, Jingxian, Wuhu, Langqi, and
Guangde Counties in Anhui Province, and
is also situated around a few villages in
Anji and Changxing counties in Zhejiang
Province, adjacent to the Anhui border. In
1983 the Chinese Alligator's Natural
Refuge organized the research workers of
several counties to make a survey and
statistically estimated that the number of
alligators was about 500. Among the 200
animals captured in part by the
investigation, and in part by the Research
Center of Chinese Alligator Reproduction,
only 4.6% were immature, and 95.4%
were older than 10 years of age. Thus, the
age pyramid was inverted. Other recent
investigations on alligator eggs found that
the number of eggs has gradually declined
in recent years. The Research Center of
Chinese Alligator Reproduction obtained
270 eggs in 1982, 278 eggs in 1983, 154
eggs in 1984, and 85 eggs in 1985. The
eggs have not only declined in quantity.
They also rarely hatched normally. Thus, it
is clear that the wild Chinese Alligator
population is declining.
Reasons for the dwindling of the
range and number of the Chinese
Alligator
Climatic change
Fossil alligators were distributed in the
Junggar Basin, Xinjiang Uygur
Autonomous Region during the late Eocene
to the Oligocene. In the Recent epoch, their
range extended to the Yellow River.
However, in our country it is recorded with
reliable authority that there is no trace of
them in these regions. This fact indicates
that in some regions, the Chinese Alligator
has long been extinct. Climatic variations
are an important factor, and it is known that
the worldwide climate became cold during
ice-ages in the Quaternary period.
According to information provided by
Jiacheng Zhang, the greater ice-age of the
Quaternary period in our country may be
divided into six sub-ice-ages and six inter-
ice-ages. The yearly average temperature
of the inter-ice-ages was 3° - 6°C higher
than that of the present, but the average
yearly temperature of the sub-ice-ages was
6° - 12°C lower than that of the present.
According to records in literature, in 903
BC and 897 BC, the Han River froze
twice. In 366 AD, continuous freezing
prevailed for three years on the surface of
Bohai Bay from Changli to Yingkou. At
that time, vehicles, horses, and troops 3000
to 40000 strong could pass over the ice
surface. Carriages could pass over Taihu
Lake when it was frozen in 1111 AD. The
Chinese Alligator is an animal that is
adapted to warm weather and not to cold.
Late hibernation is an important period,
then the reproductive organs develop. At
low temperatures, reproduction cannot
proceed normally. The hatching stage is
about one month, and requires a
temperature of about 30°C. If it is lower
than 28°C, the young can hardly hatch.
Thus it is certain that it is difficult for the
Chinese Alligator to proliferate in chilly
regions. They can only occupy the area
south of the Yangtse River because there is
a cool climate to the north.
Habitat destruction, the most important
factor
The Chinese Alligator likes to live in
water habitats such as ditches, ponds,
reservoirs, etc. These habitats accumulate
water year-round. These provide a mild
and damp climate. Grass and trees grow
luxuriantly, and numerous species of
animals are common. This environment
enables the Chinese Alligator to not only
procure food, build holes, and mate in the
water, but also to build nests and produce
offspring on land. In the course of
thousands of years, it was here that people
reclaimed wasteland and built water
conservation projects. Artificially
cultivated plants were grown instead of
natural vegetation. The alligator's holes
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 131
and nest-sites were destroyed extensively.
All of this resulted in reduction of range
and population size. We have investigated
the habitat of the Chinese Alligator in the
villages of Wanchun and Yitai, and the
town of Qingshuihe on the outskirts of
Wuhu. At present, there is level and open
terrain with a vast extent of farmland,
numerous villages, and well-developed
roadways. The Shuiyang River lies to the
east, flowing westward where it meets the
Yangtse River. The Chinese Alligator is
extinct in this region, which was altered
radically about 80 years ago. Beach used
to stretch for tens of miles along both sides
of the Qingyi and Shuiyang Rivers. When
the tide ebbed, reeds and other plants were
exposed, providing habitat for many
varieties of animals. When the tide was at
flood, alligators were common on remote
beaches in sparsely-inhabited areas. From
the late 16th to the early 20th centuries,
people from the north of the Yangtse River
moved into this area, and began to cultivate
an increasing amount of beach land.
The Wanchun Embankment was built in
1904. When a dam was being built,
alligators were common around the flooded
plain. When a dam was completed, they
still inhabited ponds, pools, and ditches
within the dam. As the alligators dug holes
and built dens, they often destroyed the
dam, flooding seedlings, and endangering
fish and ducks. Peasants made a point of
hunting Chinese Alligators whenever they
were discovered, and the number of
individuals living in the embankment has
declined. However, on the plain that had
once been flooded, where the Shuiyang and
the western Qingyi rivers meet, a great
number of Chinese Alligators survived. In
1927, people began to build a dam at this
spot. The Yitai Embankment was
completed in 1931. Farmland and villages
replaced the beach. Within the memory of
the former generation, "Chinese Alligators
could be heard roaring everywhere in
summer -as much as frogs are heard
croaking- echoing the whole
neighborhood". It was here in 1935 that Z.
D. Xiao conducted a study and described
the state of the Chinese Alligator. There
were a number of the animals in this region
then. C. G. Zhu (1951-1956) made an
investigation in the same region and only
discovered alligators in Wuhu. This region
was a desolate beach then. In 1954 I
captured one alligator and made it onto a
specimen. It has been preserved in the
Department of Biology, Anhui Normal
University. In 1959, the Wanchun
floodgate was built to irrigate farmland. In
the meantime, people built a complete set of
engineering equipment and an irrigation
canal. All Chinese Alligators were dug out
and killed. The area became farmland, and
the habitat of the Chinese Alligator was
destroyed. A large-scale drive to eradicate
the blood fluke was launched in 1958. A
large amount of sodium pentachlorophenate
was applied to the river basin. The last
alligator at Yitai Village was poisoned.
During the twenty-odd years that followed,
Chinese Alligators and their sign were not
found. The Qingshuihe River is only an
example. Other locations met the same fate
but in various degrees. People have
multiplied considerably in the present range
of the Chinese Alligator. They weeded all
corners to get brushwood burnt. When
alligators began to build nests and hatch
eggs, sufficient weeds were needed. The
weeds grew less and less, and in 1984 only
one alligator deprived of a nest was
captured by a peasant.
Due to the fact that vegetation was
destroyed, the areas of water in reserve had
sharply dropped, and the area of wasteland
to reclaim had greatly increased. The
ponds and ditches that have never dried in
history show frequent droughts at present.
Moreover, because the forests have
disappeared, soil and water cannot be
conserved. There are rivers that flow into
the Yangtse River (e.g. the Qingyi,
Shuiyang, and Zhang rivers) whose beds
have risen 1-2 meters in height, and have
frequently flooded. Flood and drought
have rendered the alligator's livelihood
exceedingly difficult. When habitats
incurred drought and flood, the alligator
had to move away from the dry land or the
submerged holes and look for habitat
elsewhere. They were often captured or
killed during the process of moving.
Vol. 3, p. 132
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Excessive, indiscriminate capture or
slaughter
Chinese Alligators are often killed
because they consume fish, ducklings, and
small geese, and damage dams by digging
holes. Thus they damage things that are of
immediate benefit to people. Another
significant factor is that the alligator
supplies edible meat, useful skin, and
medicinal materials. So, excessive and
indiscriminate capture and slaughter has not
been rare in the past, and remains common
in the present day. For example,
Guoxianjiayou, a book written during the
reign of Jiajing in the Ming Dynasty,
records:
The bank of the upper Yangtse River near Nanjing
often collapsed during the early years of the Ming
Dynasty. It was due to this reason that the Chinese
Alligators had herein drilled holes. It was reported
that there was an old fisherman who had once said:
'Roast dogs were used as bait, put a hook; by
raising the bait, you trapped alligators'.
The above record was not mentioned in the
history of the middle Ming Dynasty, which
verified the fact that after excessive
harvesting during the early years of the
Ming Dynasty, Chinese Alligators living in
the Nanjing area had become very scarce.
The Classical Chinese Materia Medica,
written by S. Z. Li, recorded the medicinal
value of Chinese Alligators, and their meat
was served as favorite dishes at wedding
feasts. All these serve to verify that
catching alligators was in great vogue at
that time. After going through the great
disaster of catching and killing during the
Ming Dynasty, the alligator's population
was reduced, and its range dwindled
rapidly. During the Qing Dynasty, the
government began to divide land into
regions to provide cattle ranches for the
Mandarin. For example, Wanchun Dan in
Wuhu district was an area of land reserved
for cattle ranches. People were forbidden
to plough or sow in such land so that wild
grass could grow densely. Such
reservations gave alligators fine conditions
for prolific reproduction. But the custom
of killing alligators continued.. Peasants
not only caught alligators by using fish
hooks, but developed a new device of
string bows set around the burrows. As
soon as the alligators emerged, they were
trapped.
Application of large amounts of chemical
fertilizers and insecticides in the field
Alligators feed on snails, mother-of-
pearl, shrimp, aquatic insects, fish, frogs,
turtles, birds, and small mammals. Among
these, aquatic animals are their chief food.
Since a great quantity of chemical fertilizers
and insecticides have been applied to
farmland in recent years, the growth of the
fish, shrimp, and mothers-of-pearl is
affected when the polluted water flows into
ponds. So, the decrease of natural food
has greatly influenced the reproductive
success and survival capacity of alligators.
It is common for young alligators to die
during the winter season due to
insufficiency of food.
Protection and captive breeding of
the Chinese Alligator
In order to ensure the survival of the
Chinese Alligator, the Forestry Department
of the China National Government, and the
Anhui Provincial Government have taken
two measures.
1. Conservation
The first measure (in 1980) was to set up
natural conservation effort for the species.
The main goal was the protection and
enlargement of the existing Chinese
Alligator population and the protection of
their habitat. Thus, a unit of leadership
was established in the project which covers
five counties with their respective species-
protection work units. Reported here is the
conservation effort:
In order to observe and investigate the
location and population size of the species,
the conservation workers in each county
employ identical approaches. They inquire
with the local folks, explore caves, and
calculate statistics using headlamps. Every
possible water habitat is examined. Since
alligators have stationary territories,
observation in the field is convenient. A
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 133
stock of information resulted from the
project, and provided valuable data for the
development of the species.
Through legislative measures, the
National Government has ruled that the
Chinese Alligator is a first-class rare animal
to be conserved and protected. Hunting is
not allowed. According to Item 1 30 of the
National Offense Law, those who break
hunting regulations by hunting in a
restricted region, during a restricted period,
by forbidden means, or harm rare animals,
will be sentenced to two years in prison, or
be subject to a heavy penalty. These
regulations are strictly enforced by the
police, who exercise their mission to keep
the dignity of the law.
It is openly advocated that the Chinese
Alligator is one of China's rare and
valuable animals, and belongs to our
national resources. Local folks are
enlightened and therefore change their view
of the Chinese Alligator as a harmful
species. Folks are also made to recognize
the great significance of the Chinese
Alligator in academic research and its
considerable economic benefits. Thus,
everyone begins to be concerned about the
species, and protects it. The provincial and
local governments also post notices to
inform the public that protection of the
Chinese Alligator is rewarded, while the
killing of the species is punished.
A full consideration of spatial and
temporal factors strengthens the
effectiveness of the conservation effort.
Because the alligators presently have a
fragmented distribution, their conservation
is negatively affected by overcrowded
human habitats with their large stretches of
farmland and weaving highways.
Considering these factors, many
conservations stations are set up in the
conservation area. If alligators are spotted
in their caves, a conservation station is
immediately set up with someone (usually a
local farmer) who is responsible for the
station and is paid from a special fund from
the National Forestry Department. As the
conservation station, no one is allowed to
use chemicals, to cut grass, or to ravage the
alligator nests and eggs. Consequently, the
alligators in the conservation area enjoy
proper protection. In some areas, alligators
obtain the necessary conditions for
reproduction, such as in Xuancheng,
Nanling, and Jingxian counties, where in
the past two years, alligators have been
seen nesting, laying eggs, and hatching
young. The alligator population in these
areas is recovering and increasing in size.
2. Research
In order to achieve the rapid and
effective recovery of the Chinese Alligator
population, the second measure taken by
the Forestry Department and the Anhui
Provincial Government was to set up the
Anhui Research Center of Chinese Alligator
Reproduction in close cooperation with the
Department of Biology, Anhui Normal
University. Here, a thorough study of the
ecology of the species has been made. This
has resulted in a systematic theory to be
applied to captive breeding and artificial
reproduction. Currently, the artificial
incubation of Chinese Alligator eggs, and
the raising of the young alligators has had
much success. Details are reported as
follows:
Pen construction. A pen for alligators
should be located in quiet marshy areas
with appropriate temperatures and rich
sources of food. After the location in
decided, pens must be constructed with
walls of brick, stone and cement. The
height of the walls should be over two
meters. When the rainy season comes, the
walls may by surrounded by standing
water, so the foundation should by 1.5 m
below ground level, so as to keep the
alligators from escaping by digging. The
pen pond should be planted with trees and
bushes, making it possible for the alligators
to nest under the cover of vegetation. The
land should be scattered with wild seeds to
provide the necessary grass for nesting.
The depth of the pond water should be kept
at 0.5 m or more. Within the pond, small
islands are built, where the alligators can
enjoy sunshine.
Captive breeding. Captive breeding efforts
Vol. 3, p. 134
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
must take into account such biological
factors as sexual maturity, courtship,
copulation, nesting, and hatching. At
different stages of growth, alligators have
different requirements as to the quality and
quantity of food. At sexual maturity,
alligators need many kinds of substances,
so food should be prepared with variety.
During courtship and copulation, when
they are stimulated by sexual hormones,
both males and females are very active, and
will often fight for a sexual partner. Males
and females should be grouped on a ratio of
one male with three to five females. The
water depth should meet the requirements
of activity and copulation. For constructing
nests, large quantities of grass should be
provided in the reproduction areas, so as to
provide sufficient nesting materials for the
gravid females, and to prevent fighting,
harmful interactions, and decrease in egg
deposition. During the entire period of
reproduction, female alligators must be kept
in extreme quiet in order for them to
perform. As the alligator's appetite is
slightly decreased by the process of
reproduction, feeding should be monitored.
After egg deposition, alligators begin to eat
more, and the usual level of feeding is
resumed. Overfeeding is to be avoided,
lest the alligators gain too much fat, which
affects their health and lowers reproductive
productivity. During the winter, more care
should be given, and all alligators who
have not entered their caves before
hibernation should be captured and sent to
artificial hibernation chambers.
Egg deposition of captive alligators. Given
the above requirements, captive alligators
can lay eggs normally. The adult captive
alligators we bred laid 264 eggs in 1983,
503 eggs in 1984, 809 eggs in 1985, 801
eggs in 1986, 1045 eggs in 1987, and 1219
eggs in 1988.
Artificial incubation of alligator
eggs
Construction of incubation chambers
The incubation of alligator eggs requires
high temperature and humidity. In
constructing incubation chambers, enough
emphasis should be placed on temperature
and means of raising temperature. The
surface of the chamber walls should be
waterproof. The walls and floor should
allow for cleaning readily. The incubation
chambers at he Chinese Alligator Research
Center have a double glass roof, and a
double glass wall that faces south.
Temperature is controlled by the
temperature-controller. The incubation
chambers should not be too spacious, so as
to save energy and allow for easy control.
Equipment for incubation
Make a round egg collector and a square
incubator which can let water go through at
the bottom, to keep the eggs from being
suffocated by the standing water at the
bottom. Plants which can help stabilize
temperature and humidity, and allow for
ventilation, best serve as the filling of the
incubator. The research center finds that
moss is a very good filling material. The
search is continuing for better fillings. The
chamber temperature is generally controlled
and monitored by means of electricity.
Techniques of incubation
1) Immediate collection of alligator eggs
is required, as too many alligators in the
reproduction area can possibly get the eggs
crushed if not collected in time.
2) Egg collectors are used in collecting
eggs. Quick action is required, and
attention is to be given to the natural order
of the eggs. The alligator eggs are stacked
in baskets according to their natural order,
and are sent to the incubation chambers
immediately. Try to avoid shaking as much
as possible in carrying the eggs.
3) Incubators and incubation chambers
should be kept clean and be adequately
sterilized to avoid bacterial or viral
infections.
4) Alligator eggs are often in multilayer
order when discovered in the wild.
Artificial incubation requires monolayer
arrangement.
April 1990
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 135
5) Incubation temperature should be
maintained at about 31°C. Humidity for the
first four weeks is 95%. Use 85-95%
humidity for the rest of the incubation
period.
Raising young alligators
The mortality of young alligators is high
in the first year, thus the key to breeding is
the successful raising these juveniles.
Construction of cages
Cages for young alligators have
requirements identical to those of the
incubation chambers, as well as ventilation,
sunlight, and adequate water and drainage.
Methods of raising hatchlings
The time between pipping and
breakdown of the shell varies from a little
over an hour, to two to three days.
Hatchlings slow in liberating themselves
are often poor in health, so they should be
taken good care of. The hatchling has a
crack 1.3-1.5 cm long in the vent in which
some unconsumed yolk remains. This
continues to provide sustenance for the
hatchling, which needs no food during its
early infancy. When to feed the hatchlings
is still being studied. The newly-hatched
alligators can be kept in the cage with
enough area of water and dry sand and
stone for the alligator to move about freely.
Water supply and sanitary conditions are a
significant factor in survival rate.
Consequently, daily cleaning is required to
remove food remains and excrement.
When the hatchlings need to be fed, some
Oryzias latipes can be thrown into the cage
alive. Hatchlings in dry areas can be fed
with fish meat in a small saucer, or with
artificially-prepared food. Hatchlings are
especially greedy; however, too much food
can give rise to gout. If hatchlings are
found in low spirits, tired of eating, or
suffering from paralysis of the legs (a
symptom of gout), feeding should be
stopped immediately.
Soon after the hatchlings liberate
themselves from the shell, the weather gets
cool, which could reduce their appetite.
Now, the temperature should be raised.
The temperature in the cage must be
maintained at approximately 31°C. The
hatchlings will recover their appetite and
will gain weight rapidly. In fine weather
when the temperature rises to its normal
level, hatchlings should be given more of a
chance to enjoy sunshine. Individual
differences in growth rate will be evident
by now, and the young alligators should be
grouped accordingly. In the area around
the cages it is desirable to keep quiet, cut
down human interference, reduce the
possibility of infection by pathogens, and
to reduce the possibility of" predation on the
alligators by mice. When the young
alligators grow as weighty as 40 g, they
can be sent into hibernation. Two or three
days before hibernation, feeding is stopped
so as to avoid diseases and ailment caused
by food left in the digestive canal when
temperature is lowered. It is desirable to
reduce the temperature gradually until all
food is completely digested. Temperature
should be lowered by 2-3°C each time.
Below 20°C, a larger decrease is allowable.
10°C is the proper hibernation temperature.
Hibernation chambers can be set up
underground, at a temperature of 10-12°C,
and at 80% humidity. Late in hibernation,
bowls of fresh water are supplied for the
young alligators.
To conclude, our breeding techniques
generally agree with the natural growth of
young alligators in the wild.
Consequently, the population rises year by
year. The number of surviving captive-
bred Chinese Alligators is as follows: 66 in
1982, 77 in 1983, 117 in 1984, 300 in
1985, 450 in 1986, and 975 in 1987.
Acknowledgments
I thank Prof. Ermi Zhao for his kind
help in correcting this paper.
References
CAO, K. 1984. [On the geographical and
historical origins and the reasons for the decline
of Alligator sinensis in China]. Acta
Herpetologica Sinica 1984, 3(3):73-76. (In
Vol. 3, p. 136
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1990
Chinese).
CHEN, B., S. WANG, AND B. WANG. 1984. [The
rarely seen reptile animal — Chinese Alligator].
Anhui Science Press, Anhui, China. 120 pp.
(In Chinese).
CHEN, B., Z. HUA, AND B. LI. 1985. [Chinese
Alligator]. Anhui Science Press, Anhui, China,
pp. 186-239. (In Chinese).
CHU, C. 1954. Chinese Alligator. Biological
Bulletin 9: 9-11.
WEN, H. AND Z. HUANG. 1981. [A discussion
about the changes of the geographical
distribution of the Chinese Alligators]. Acta
Xiangtan University 1: 112-122. (In Chinese).
XU, Q. AND C. HUANG. 1984. [Some problems
in the evolution and distribution of alligators].
Vertebrate Paleontology 22(l):49-53. (In
Chinese).
ZHANG, J. AND Z. LIN. 1985. The [Chinese
climate]. Shanghai Science and Technique
Press, pp. 506-522. (In Chinese).
CHU, C. 1957. [Observation of the life history of
Chinese Alligator]. Acta Zoologica Sinica 9(2):
129-144. (In Chinese)
ZHANG, M. AND Z. HUANG. 1978. (Treatise on
the study of Reptilia). Journal of Haerbin
Teachers Collage, 2. (In Chinese).
HUANG, W., D. FANG, AND Y. YU. 1982.
[Preliminary study on the fossil hominid skull
and fauna of Hexian, Anhui]. Palaontologia
Sinica, series C, 20(3):248-256. (In Chinese).
ZHOU, B. 1982. [Skeletal remains of the Yangtse
Alligator, discovered at the Wangyin Neolithic
Site, Yanzhou, Shandong]. Acta Archeologica
Sinica 2:251-262. (In Chinese)
I April 1990 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 3, pp. 137-140|
Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation and Submission
Summary
Manuscripts must:
1) be written in English.
2) be of letter quality (typewritten on bond paper).
3) include camera ready figures (if any).
4) include complete and accurate literature citations.
5) include complete and accurate localities with latitude and longitude.
6) include a camera ready map illustrating regions discussed (when applicable).
Manuscripts failing to meet these criteria will be returned for correction.
Purpose and Content
Asiatic Herpetological Research publishes articles concerning but not limited to Asian
herpetology. The editors encourage publications from all countries in an attempt to create
an open forum for the discussion of Asian herpetological research.
Articles should be in standard scientific format and style. The following sections should
be included:
Title. The title should reflect the general content of the article in as few words as possible.
A poor title may cause readers to read no further.
Names and Addresses. The names and addresses of all authors must be complete enough
to allow postal correspondence.
Abstract. The abstract should briefly summarize the nature of the research, its results, and
the main conclusions. Abstracts should be less than 300 words.
Key Words. Key words provide an index for the filing of articles. Key words provide the
following information (when applicable): 1) Taxonomy (e.g. Reptilia, Squamata,
Gekkonidae, Gekko gecko ). 2) Geography (e.g. China, Thailand). 3) Subject (e.g.
taxonomic validity, ecology, biogeography). The order of taxonomy, geography, and
subject should be observed.
Text. Manuscripts must be in English and spelling must be correct and consistent. Use
Webster's New International Dictionary for reference. For clarity, use active voice
whenever possible. For example, the following sentences in active voice are preferable to
those in passive voice.
Active voice:
"Lizards were extremely common on the site." and "The three snakes examined were female."
Passive voice:
"Lizards were observed to be extremely common on the site." and "Three snakes were examined
and were found to be female."
Abbreviation. Do not abbreviate unless the full phrase has already appeared. Scientific
names may be abbreviated only if they have appeared fully in the same paragraph. Never
begin a sentence with an abbreviation of a scientific name.
© 1990 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 3, p. 138 Asiatic Herpetological Research April 1990
Standard Format
Manuscripts following standard format should include introduction, methods, results,
and discussion sections. While other formats are acceptable, the editors encourage the use
of standard format.
Introduction. The introduction typically states the significance of the topic and reviews
prior research.
Methods. This section should clearly state where, when, and how research was carried
out. Include sample sizes. Protocols designed by other investigators must be properly
cited. Research materials and their manufacturers should be listed. The reader must be
able to replicate the methods of the author(s).
Results. This section states the results and their significance to the investigation. Figures
and tables may be used to clarify, but not to replace, results statements in the text.
Statistics should be used when applicable. Large amounts of data should be avoided, or
included as an appendix at the end of the article.
Discussion. The discussion is a synthesis of the introduction and the results. No new
information should be discussed unless it was presented in the results section. New
findings should be discussed in relation to prior research. The author(s) should feel free to
present several possible interpretations of the results. The editors particularly encourage
suggestions of future research in Asian herpetology.
Section Headings
Articles will be published using three section heading styles. Level 1: text is bold and
centered Level 2: text is italic and centered. Level 3: text is italic and at the beginning of
the first paragraph. Authors should take this style into account when writing manuscripts.
Statistics
Statistics must be accompanied by sample sizes, significance levels, and the names of
any tests. Investigators should pay careful attention to independence and applicability of
tests, and randomness of samples. One of the most frequent examples of nonindependence
is the use of multiple, paired t-tests instead of analysis of variance (ANOVA). In general,
multiple tests on the same data set are not valid. Descriptive statistics are in
many cases more appropriate than inferential statistics.
References
Accurate and standard references are a crucial part of any article. This is especially
important when dealing with publications from many different countries. The reader must
be able to precisely identify any literature cited. References in the text must be checked for
consistency with references in the literature cited section. All references cited in the
text must be in the literature cited section. The literature cited section may
not contain any references not mentioned in the text. Articles containing
inaccurate or inconsistent literature citations will be returned for correction.
References In Text
1) References to articles by one or two authors must include both surnames in the order
they appear in the original publication. References to articles by more than two
authors must include the first author's surname, followed by "et al."
2) The year of article follows the authors, separated only by a space.
3) References with the same author and year are distinguished by the lower case characters
a, b, c, ...
April 1990 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 3, p. 139
4) References cited in text are listed in alphabetical order by first author.
For example, "My results also incorporate literature records (Marx et al. 1982; Marx and Rabb
1972; Mertens 1930; Pope 1929; Wall 1909, 1910a, 1910b, 1910c).
References In Literature Cited
1) References must include all authors, in the order that they appear in the original
publication; "et al." is never used in a literature cited section.
2) The first author is listed surname first, initial(s) last. All other authors are listed
initial(s) first, surname last.
3) References with the same author and year are distinguished by the lower case
characters, "a, b, c, ..."
4) References cited are listed in alphabetical order by first author.
5) Names of journals are not abbreviated.
See below for examples:
Journal article.
Dial, B. E. 1987. Energetics and performance during nest emergence and the hatchling frenzy in
loggerhead sea turtles (Caretta caretta ). Herpetologica43(3):307-315.
Journal article from a journal that uses year instead of volume.
Gatten, R. E. Jr. 1974. Effect of nutritional state on the preferred body temperatures of turtles.
Copeia 1974(4):912-917.
Journal article, title translated, article not in English.
Ananjeva, N. B. 1986. [On the validity of Megalochilus mystaceus (Pallas, 1776)]. Proceedings
of the Zoological Institute, Leningrad 157:4-13. (In Russian).
Note that for Acta Herpetologica Sinica, the year must precede the volume number. This
is to distinguish between the old and new series, and between 1987, Vol. 6 numbers 1-4
and 1988, Vol. 6 numbers 1-2.
Cai, M., J. Zhang, and D. Lin. 1985. [Preliminary observation on the embryonic development of
Hynobius chinensis Guenther]. Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(2): 177-180. (In Chinese).
Book.
Pratt, A. E. 1892. To the snows of Tibet through China. Longmans, Green, and Co., London.
268 pp.
Article in book.
Huey, R. B. 1982. Temperature, physiology, and the ecology of reptiles. Pp. 25-91. In C. Gans
and F. H. Pough (eds.), Biology of the Reptilia, Vol. 12, Physiological Ecology. Academic
Press, New York.
Government publication.
United States Environmental Data Service. 1968. Climatic Atlas of the United States.
Environmental Data Service, Washington, D. C.
Abstract of oral presentation
Arnold, S. J. 1982. Are scale counts used in snake systematics heritable? SSAR/HL Annual
Meeting. Raleigh, North Carolina. [Abstr].
Thesis or dissertation.
Moody, S. 1980. Phylogenetic and historical biogeographical relationships of the genera in the
Agamidae (Reptilia: Lacertilia). Ph.D. Thesis. University of Michigan. 373 pp.
Anonymous, undated.
Anonymous. Undated. Turpan brochure. Promotion Department of the National Tourism
Administration of the People's Republic of China, China Travel and Tourism Press, Turpan,
Vol. 3, p. 140 Asiatic Herpetological Research April 1990
Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region, China.
Figures and Tables
Figures and tables should be referenced in order in the text Each table should be
typewritten, double spaced on a separate sheet. See below for instructions for Figures.
Plates
All figure plates submitted must be of publication quality, and should ideally be camera
ready. All text in figures must be of typeset quality. Times Roman typeface is
preferred.
If typeset quality lettering is not possible for the author(s), Asiatic Herpetological
Research will accept figure plates without lettering. The following instructions must be
followed precisely:
1) Carefully label figures in pencil, on the back, or attach a photocopy or an additional
sheet with instructions.
2) Do not submit figures with poor type or handwriting on the face of the figure.
Substandard figures will be returned for correction. In order to avoid wasted effort, please
follow the above instructions carefully.
Figure Legends
Figure legends should be typed on a separate sheet. Legends should explain the figure
without reference to the text. A figure and legend should make sense if separated from the
rest of the article. For example:
FIG. 2. Lateral view of live Psammodynastes pulverulentus holding a prey lizard (Anolis
carolinensis ). Note buccal tissue surrounding the enlarged anterior maxillary and dentary teeth of the
snake.
Copyright
Asiatic Herpetological Research reserves the copyrights to all material published therein,
except that excluded by permission of the editors. Any material under a prior copyright
submitted to Asiatic Herpetological Research must be accompanied by the written consent
of the copyright holder.
Submission of Manuscripts
Authors should submit letter quality, double spaced, single-sided manuscripts both in
English and in the original language on 21.5 x 28 cm (8.5 x 11 inch) white bond paper.
If possible, include a computer diskette containing the manuscript. Macintosh diskettes
with Macwrite, Write Now, Microsoft Word, or text files, or MS/PC DOS diskettes with
Word Perfect, Wordstar, Microsoft Word, RTF, or ASCII files are preferable.
Computerized manuscripts should include italic, bold, and centered text only. Additional
formatting is not necessary or desirable.
Manuscripts will be reviewed. The editors will attempt to choose reviewers whose
research knowledge most closely matches the content of the manuscript.
Asiatic Herpetological Research requests $25 US per printed page from authors with
funds available. Please indicate if funds are available.
C.C. Liu 1900-1976
This volume of Asiatic
Herpetological Research is
dedicated to the memory of
Cheng-chao Liu. This year
is the 90th anniversary of
his birth. C. C. Liu,
China's most eminent
herpetologist, was the
author of 55 papers and two
books on herpetological
subjects. Liu died in
Chengdu, Sichuan, China
on 9 April 1976.
(ISSN 1051-;
CONTENTS
ORLOV, NIKOLAI L. AND BORIS S. TUNIYEV. Three Species in the Vipera kaznakowi
Complex (Eurosiberian Group) in the Caucasus: Their Present Distribution, Possible
Genesis, and Phylogeny 1
ADLER, KRAIG AND ERMI ZHAO. Studies on Hynobiid Salamanders, With Description of
a New Genus 37
WU, RUIMIN AND JIE HUANG. Relationships Between Serum T4, T3, Cortisol and the
Metabolism of Chemical Energy Sources in the Cobra During Pre-hibernation,
Hibernation and Post-hibernation 46
DAS, INDRANEIL AND PETER C. H. PRITCHARD. Intergradation Between Melanochelys
trijuga trijuga and M . t. coronata (Testudines: Emydidae: Batagurinae) 52
LOSOS, JONATHAN B. Thermal Sensitivity of Sprinting and Clinging Performance in the
Tokay Gecko {Gekko gecko ) 54
Mu, YONG AND ERMI ZHAO. Mating Call Structures of the Chinese Frog, Rana
nigromaculata (Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae) 60
LAZELL, JAMES AND WENHUA LU. Four Remarkable Reptiles from South China Sea
Islands, Hong Kong Territory 64
TUNIYEV, BORIS S. On the Independence of the Colchis Center of Amphibian and Reptile
Speciation 67
PAN, JIONGHUA AND DANYU LIANG. Studies of the Early Embryonic Development of
Rana rugulosa Wiegmann 85
ZHAO, ERMI. The Validity of E lap he perlacea, a Rare Endemic Snake from Sichuan
Province, China 101
ananjeva, Natalia b., Gunther peters, J. Robert Macey, and Theodore J.
PAPENFUSS. Stellio sacra (Smith 1935) - a Distinct Species of Asiatic Rock Agamid
from Tibet 104
Tang, Yiquan, Shengkai Tian, Shixiang Wu, Jiacheng Hua, Xinquan Ji, Guanfu
WU, ERMI ZHAO, AND GANG ZOU. Isolation and Amino Acid Sequence of a New
Dodecapeptide from the Skin of Oreolalax pingii 116
Fu, JlNZHONG AND ERMI ZHAO. The Validity of Sacalia quadriocellata 120
RASHID, S. M. A. AND IAN R. SWINGLAND. Interim Report on the Freshwater Turtle
Trade in Bangladesh 123
CHEN, BlHUl. The Past and Present Situation of the Chinese Alligator 129
Guidelines for Manuscript preparation and Submission 137
Harvard MCZ Library
3 2044 066 300 419